Electricity Meters IECINDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL H 71 0200 0016 k en Revision history Index − a b c d e e f g h k Date 26.07.1999 11.02.2000 28.09.2000 18.06.2001 12.03.2002 25.06.2002 19.07.2002 06.12.2002 31.03.2003 01.05.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections New layout according to CI, Changes in related sections Chapter 4.1 in Chapter 4 enclosed (H71 0200 0022 not further needed) Section 4.16 new, section 4.1 integrated in section 4 (H 71 0200 0022 omitted). Changes in related sections for software version B21. Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 0-2 H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history List of associated sections The user manual H 71 0200 0016 en comprises the following sections: Section 1 2 3 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Designation Safety Description of unit and technical data Mechanical construction Function Overview Measuring unit Inputs and outputs Calendar clock Time switch Ripple control receiver Tariff control Energy recording Demand recording Power factors Operating time registers Formation of billing periods (resetting) Profiles Monitoring functions Security system Operating messages Control elements and displays Communication interfaces Installation and commissioning Maintenance and service Error messages and measures in event of faults Decommissioning, disposal Index Identification H 71 0200 0019 en H 71 0200 0018 en H 71 0200 0020 en H 71 0200 0021 en H 71 0200 0021 en H 71 0200 0023 en H 71 0200 0036 en H 71 0200 0243 en H 71 0200 0029 en H 71 0200 0030 en H 71 0200 0026 en H 71 0200 0024 en H 71 0200 0025 en H 71 0200 0033 en H 71 0200 0244 en H 71 0200 0245 en H 71 0200 0032 en H 71 0200 0031 en H 71 0200 0038 en H 71 0200 0242 en H 71 0200 0035 en H 71 0200 0247 en H 71 0200 0039 en H 71 0200 0041 en H 71 0200 0042 en H 71 0200 0043 en H 71 0200 0034 en H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual List of associated sections Landis+Gyr 0-3 Table of contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 2.2.16 2.2.17 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 Safety ____________________________________________1-5 Safety information ___________________________________________1-5 Responsibilities ______________________________________________1-5 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 Description of unit and technical data ____________________2-5 Survey_____________________________________________________2-5 General view ________________________________________________2-5 Purpose of use ______________________________________________2-6 Field of application ___________________________________________2-7 Type designation ____________________________________________2-9 Review of main characteristics _________________________________2-10 Technical data _____________________________________________2-12 Voltage values _____________________________________________2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 1 A _____2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5 A _____2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5//1 A 2-13 Secondary starting values ____________________________________2-13 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-14 Power consumption _________________________________________2-14 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________2-14 Calendar clock _____________________________________________2-15 Output values ______________________________________________2-15 Inputs and outputs __________________________________________2-16 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-17 Supplementary power supply __________________________________2-17 Voltage behaviour___________________________________________2-17 External influences __________________________________________2-18 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________2-19 Connections _______________________________________________2-20 Connection diagrams ________________________________________2-21 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks ______________________2-21 Meters for three-phase four-wire networks _______________________2-22 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________2-23 Extension board ____________________________________________2-23 Landis+Gyr 0-4 H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 Mechanical construction ______________________________3-5 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 Face plate_________________________________________________ 3-10 Function ________________________________________ 4.1-7 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-7 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-7 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-9 Signal processing _________________________________________ 4.1-10 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-10 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1-10 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.1-11 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.1-11 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.1-11 Extension board __________________________________________ 4.1-11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-12 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-5 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-5 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-7 Signal processing __________________________________________ 4.1-8 Signal utilization___________________________________________ 4.1-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.1-8 Data preparation for billing __________________________________ 4.1-9 Memory _________________________________________________ 4.1-9 Power supply _____________________________________________ 4.1-9 Supplementary power supply ________________________________ 4.1-9 Extension board ___________________________________________ 4.1-9 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-10 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-10 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 Landis+Gyr 0-5 H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 Landis+Gyr 0-6 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs__________________________________ 4.3-11 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Summer/winter time________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Power reserve_____________________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal ______________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface______________________ 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.4-10 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 Tariff control via ripple control receiver _________________________ 4.6-5 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.6-12 Tariff control ______________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions _________________________________________ 4.7-7 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.7-8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.8-10 H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents 14.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.12 4.14.9.3 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.13.9.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.5 4.13.9.9 4.3 4.14.12.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.12.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9.14.3 4.1 4.9 4.8.ZMD400 AT / CT .13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.3 4.2 4.12-6 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.8.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.2 4.12.1 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.2 4.1 4.10-9 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.3 4.2 4.6 4.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.4 4.ZFD400 AT / CT .1 4.14 4.9.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.1 4.10.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.8-10 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9.9-19 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.1 4.9.14.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.11 4.2 4.11 4.4 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period _________________ 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.12.9.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.8.7 4.13-13 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.11.10.14-7 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.6 4.10 4.13.4 4.9.10-8 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.14-8 Landis+Gyr 0-7 H 71 0200 0016 k en .5 4.14.8-12 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.8 4.4 4.13 4.9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.6 Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.11-5 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.10.8 4.9-19 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.10 4.9.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.7 4.10.User Manual Table of contents .4.9. 16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.ZFD400 AT / CT .2 6.3 Power factor monitoring____________________________________ 4.1 5.1.1 5.15 4.16.1 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.8.3 4.16 4.3.16-8 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 Display buttons ______________________________________________5-5 Control of display via optical interface ____________________________5-5 Reset button ________________________________________________5-6 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________5-7 Introduction ________________________________________________5-7 Basic layout_________________________________________________5-7 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 Display list_________________________________________________5-11 Service list_________________________________________________5-14 Optical test output __________________________________________5-16 Communication interfaces_____________________________6-5 Survey_____________________________________________________6-5 Optical interface _____________________________________________6-6 S0 interface_________________________________________________6-6 RS232 interface _____________________________________________6-7 RS485 interface _____________________________________________6-7 CS interface ________________________________________________6-8 M-Bus interface______________________________________________6-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________6-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________6-10 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________6-12 Landis+Gyr 0-8 H 71 0200 0016 k en .1.2 5.2 5.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15.15.3 5 5.2 5.3.15.2 4.8.8.5 4.3 5.3 5.15-9 Operating messages _______________________________________ 4.1 6.14-9 Security system __________________________________________ 4.6 6.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.15.15.4 4.4.16-5 Survey__________________________________________________ 4.2 4.4 6.2.5 6.8 6.2.3 6.User Manual Table of contents .ZMD400 AT / CT .1 5.4 6 6.1 4.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.7 6.2 6.3.15-5 Security levels____________________________________________ 4.1 5.16.3 5.1.1 6.7 4.15-6 Security levels and their application___________________________ 4.3 5.2.16.2 5.14. 2.2 9.4 10 10.ZFD400 AT / CT .User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 0-9 . disposal ___________________________10-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 Index____________________________________________11-3 H 71 0200 0016 k en .2 9.1 7.3.3 7.2.4 8.6 7.4 8.2.3 8.3 8.6 8.5 9 9.2.1 8.3 9.6.3.1.5 8.5 7.1 9.2 7.1 9.1 7.9 7 7.2.2 9.3 7.3.3.ZMD400 AT / CT .1 10.2 8.2 8.2.2 11 Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Connection to low voltage with current transformers________________ 7-6 Connection to medium and high voltage (Aron circuit) ______________ 7-6 Connection to medium and high voltage (three-phase four-wire circuit) 7-8 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-9 Connecting meter __________________________________________ 7-11 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-15 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-16 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 Changing the battery ________________________________________ 8-11 Error messages and measures in event of faults ____________9-5 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 Structure of an error message _________________________________ 9-5 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 Disconnecting meters _______________________________________ 9-11 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)_______________ 9-13 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14 Decommissioning.2 7.7 8 8.4 7.1.1 9.1 8.3. construction and function of the meters • Information about possible dangers. their consequences and measures to prevent any danger • Details concerning the performance of all work throughout the service life of the meters (parametrization. Users of this manual are familiar from their training with the basic principles of electrical engineering. shutting down and disposal) Target group The contents of this user manual are intended for technically qualified personnel of energy supply companies responsible for the system planning.User Manual Introduction . installation. operation. This provides the following structure: • Chapter 1 • Chapter 2 • Chapter 3 • Chapter 4 • Chapter 5 • Chapter 6 • Chapter 7 • Chapter 8 • Chapter 9 Safety Description of unit and technical data Mechanical construction Function Control elements and displays Communication interfaces Installation and commissioning Maintenance and service Error messages and measures in event of faults Conditions Subdivision • Chapter 10 Decommissioning.e. This includes: • Provision of knowledge concerning characteristics. The user manual contains all the information required for application of the meters for the intended purpose. etc. in particular with the principles of energy measurement. disposal • Chapter 11 Index Landis+Gyr 0-10 H 71 0200 0016 k en .ZMD400 AT / CT . This user manual is divided in a logical manner suitable for learning and application. installation and commissioning.Introduction Range of validity Purpose The present user manual applies to the meters specified on the title page. maintenance. maintenance. connection technology. including circuitry types. the individual chapters follow the sequence of information probably required during the various phases of the service life of the meters. i. decommissioning and disposal of the meters.ZFD400 AT / CT . operation. commissioning. g. The following conventions are employed in this user manual for representing type designations: • The lower case letter "x" can be used as an unknown to indicate different versions (e."Direct connection meters" for the ZMD300xx meters .ZMD400 AT / CT . ZFD410CT and ZMD410CT meters).Type designation The structure and significance of meter type designations are described in chapter 2 "Description of unit and technical data".g. • The following collective terms are also sometimes used instead of the type designation: . the fourth digit is an unknown (the first 3 digits in the type designation.ZFD400 AT / CT ."Active energy meters" for the ZMD300Ax and ZxD400Ax meters ."Combimeters" for the ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx meters • Of the four digit extension board designation (e. ZMD410AT. ZxD410xT for the ZFD410AT. • The digit pair "00" can be used to indicate accuracy data (e. • The abbreviated type designation ZMD or ZFD meters can be used when all three-phase four-wire meters or three-phase three-wire meters are meant. 240. while the fourth digit indicates whether a load profile is present or not). H 71 0200 0016 k en . e.g.g. are used for details of additional functions."Transformer connection meters" for the ZxD400xx meters . 2400) only the first 3 digits represent the function of the board. ZxD400xx for the ZxD405xx and ZxD410xx meters).User Manual Introduction Landis+Gyr 0-11 . ZMD400 AT / CT .Landis+Gyr 0-12 H 71 0200 0016 k en .ZFD400 AT / CT .User Manual Introduction . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 1 Safety H 71 0200 0019 b en . ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2000 31. Feldstrasse 1 CH .User Manual Revision history .Revision history Index − a b Date 26.1999 17.03.04.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 1-2 H 71 0200 0019 b en .07. 2 1.3 Safety ___________________________________________ 1-5 Safety information ___________________________________________ 1-5 Responsibilities ______________________________________________ 1-5 Safety regulations ___________________________________________ 1-6 H 71 0200 0019 b en .Table of contents 1 1.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 1-3 .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .1 1. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 1-4 H 71 0200 0019 b en . 2 Responsibilities The owner of the meters – normally the power supply company – is responsible that all persons engaged on work with meters: 1. Definition of Note Note For general details and other useful information to simplify the work. which could result in minor physical injury or material damage. In addition to the danger level. 3.e. outlines the responsibilities and lists the safety regulations to be observed. Strictly observe the safety regulations (according to section 1. 1.User Manual Safety Landis+Gyr 1-5 . all safety information also describes the type and source of the danger.1 Safety This section describes the safety information used in this manual.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . In particular.3) and the operating information in the individual chapters. the severity and probability of any danger: Definition of Danger Danger For a possibly dangerous situation. i. Landis+Gyr AG provides training courses for this purpose on specific equipment.1 Safety information Attention is drawn as follows in the individual chapters of this user manual with classified word symbols and pictographs to the relevant danger level. which could result in severe physical injury or fatality. 2. please contact the relevant agent if interested. Have read and understood the relevant sections of the user manual. • prevention of material damage • and the training of personnel. its possible consequences and measures to counteract the danger. Are sufficiently qualified for the work to be performed. the owner of the meters bears responsibility • for the protection of persons. H 71 0200 0019 b en . Definition of Warning Warning For a possibly dangerous situation. 1. so that other persons cannot replace them unnoticed. Water penetrating can cause short-circuits. • Local safety regulations must be observed. Internal damage can result in functional disorders or short-circuits. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until the work is completed.User Manual Safety .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Installation of the meters must be performed exclusively by technically qualified and suitably trained personnel.3 Safety regulations The following safety regulations must be observed at all times: • The conductors to which the meter will be connected must not be under voltage during installation or change of the meter. They can cause injuries if dropped.1. Contact with live parts is dangerous to life. • The meters must on no account be cleaned with running water or with high pressure devices. • Transformers in medium or high voltage systems must be earthed on one side or at the neutral point on the secondary side. • Meters which have fallen must not be installed. Otherwise they can be statically charged to a voltage which exceeds the insulation strength of the meter and is also dangerous to life. Landis+Gyr 1-6 H 71 0200 0019 b en . • The meters must be held securely during installation. The high voltage produced by the interrupted current transformer is dangerous to life and destroys the transformer. • Secondary circuits of current transformers must be short-circuited (at the test terminal block) without fail before opening. They must be returned for testing to the service and repair department responsible (or the manufacturer). even if no damage is apparent. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL 2 Description of unit and technical data H 71 0200 0136 d en . 2003 Comments First edition Maximum current 120 A under special conditions Extension board 600x (6 control inputs) cancelled Chapt.04.2002 29.01. 1.landisgyr.2002 31. Feldstrasse 1 CH .2002 18.2.07. software version section new.03.com Landis+Gyr 2-2 H 71 0200 0136 d en .02.8 Meter constant 2000 pulses per kWh dropped New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Operating messages function new.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.06.Revision history Index − − a b c d Date 28.User Manual Revision history . technical data adapted Landis+Gyr Ltd.ZMD300 AT / CT .2002 14.2003 30. 3.2.3 2.5 2.1 2.3.2.2.9 2.1 2.3 2.ZMD300 AT / CT .User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 2-3 .2.3 Description of unit and technical data ____________________2-5 Survey ____________________________________________________ 2-5 General view _______________________________________________ 2-5 Purpose of use ______________________________________________ 2-6 Field of application___________________________________________ 2-6 Type designation ____________________________________________ 2-8 Review of main characteristics _________________________________ 2-9 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 Voltage values _____________________________________________ 2-11 Current values _____________________________________________ 2-11 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 Frequency values ___________________________________________ 2-12 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 Calendar clock _____________________________________________ 2-13 Output values______________________________________________ 2-13 Inputs and outputs _________________________________________ 2-13 Serial interface _____________________________________________ 2-14 Supplementary power supply _________________________________ 2-14 Voltage behaviour __________________________________________ 2-14 External influences__________________________________________ 2-15 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________ 2-16 Connections _______________________________________________ 2-17 Connection diagrams ________________________________________ 2-19 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks______________________ 2-19 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________ 2-19 Extension board ____________________________________________ 2-20 H 71 0200 0136 d en .6 2.Table of contents 2 2.2.1 2.2.4 2.2.3 2.1.14 2.7 2.13 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.8 2.2.3.2 2.1.2.12 2.4 2.2.1.2.2.2 2.1 2.15 2.2.10 2.11 2.1.2.2.1. User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 2-4 H 71 0200 0136 d en .ZMD300 AT / CT . 1 2.ZMD300 AT / CT .1.User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-5 . 2.2 Description of unit and technical data This chapter provides you with a brief overview of the meters ZMD300xT. It also specifies their technical data and shows the most common connection diagrams.1 Survey General view The ZMD300xT meters have the following appearance. with the ZMD300CT combimeter having two optical test outputs (for reactive and active energy consumption) while the ZMD300AT active energy meter has only one for active energy: Fig. 2.1 General view of meter (example ZMD300CT) H 71 0200 0136 d en . 1.Case The meter case is made of antistatic plastic (polycarbonate). The upper viewing window with the main face plate is secured on the upper right side with a calibration seal. For further details refer to material list no.User Manual Description of unit and technical data . The data determined are displayed (LCD) and are also available at the optical interface for data acquisition. Any other application of these meters is considered not for the intended purpose. This extends from seasonal tariffs to multiple energy and demand tariffs. The tariffs can be controlled internally or externally.3 Field of application The combimeters ZMD300CT can be used for direct connection at the low voltage level. 2. RS232. etc. the optical test outputs and the optical interface for automatic readout of meter data. The lower part of the case is additionally glass-fibre reinforced. The terminal cover is available in various lengths in order to ensure the required free space for the connections. The upper part of the case is provided with two transparent plastic viewing windows.ZMD300 AT / CT . while the upper part of the case is secured on the upper left side with a manufacturer seal (warranty) or a second calibration seal. the meters can also be used as transmission contact meters for telemetering. the battery compartment. secured with a company seal. Additional functions ZMD300CT meters can be supplemented with various additional functions. They are primarily used by medium consumers.1. H 71 0264 0060. water or gas volumes). RS485. 2. Main and tariff face plate All relevant data for the meter are provided on the face plates inscribed in utility specific form. PSTN modem. affording a view of the main face plate (top) and the tariff face plate (bottom). with communication unit also as required via CS.g. The lower viewing window is in the form of a hinged front door. The tariff face plate with the connection diagram on the rear side. Openings enable the operation of the two display buttons and ensure an uninterrupted view of the liquid crystal display. GSM modem.2 Purpose of use The combimeters ZMD300CT record active and reactive energy consumption in three-phase four-wire networks on low voltage and from this determine the required electrical measured quantities. the reset button and (if present) the communication unit are situated under this front door. including: • Energy recording as advance • Measurement of individual phases Landis+Gyr 2-6 H 71 0200 0136 d en . ZMD300CT meters have a comprehensive tariff structure. When provided with transmission contacts. They are connected directly to the phase conductors at the measuring point. With communication unit the meters can also be used for recording counting pulses for other physical media (e. currents and frequency . H 71 0200 0136 d en .Frequency .of power factor (ZMD300CT only) • Event signals for .falling below power factor limits (ZMD300CT only) .of voltage.Phase angles • Power factor cosϕ (ZMD300CT only) • Calculation of apparent consumption (ZMD300CT only) • Sliding maximum demand • Load profile memory . • Signalling of important events as operating messages to the power supply company (sending of SMS messages.ZMD300 AT / CT . control of an arrow in the display.Energy . drive for an output contact.Voltages.Currents .Demand .exceeding of current and demand limits .• Measurement of instantaneous values .Status messages • Time switch • integrated ripple control receiver • Pulse inputs for external meters • Additional control inputs and output contacts in a permanently fitted extension board • Background lighting for LCD display (optional) • LCD display readable without power supply (battery required) • Installation aids • Interfaces for various communication forms and paths in an exchangeable communication unit situated outside the calibration liability. current and demand .voltage failures .) • Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present.Voltages .Power factor cosϕ (ZMD300CT only) • Stored values • Event log memory • Monitoring .User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-7 . etc.undervoltage and overvoltage occurencies . User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-8 .4 Type designation ZMD 310 CT 44.ZMD300 AT / CT . Series designation The hardware version is distinguished by the series designation.More detailed information concerning individual exchangeable communication unit can be found in the relevant separate user manuals. Version 21 24 41 44 Additional functions Additional control inputs on extension board 0 2 4 No additional control inputs 2 additional control inputs 4 additional control inputs Additional output contacts on extension board 0 No additional output contacts 2 2 additional output contacts 4 4 additional output contacts 6 6 additional output contacts Hardware functions on extension board 0 No additional hardware 3 Integrated ripple control receiver 5 Supplementary power supply Profile 0 7 No load profile Load profile The codes for version. while for the 2nd H 71 0200 0136 d en . modular communication Complex tariff functions. The 1st hardware generation (series 1) has no series designation. unless necessary for understanding. Users can change it at any time without opening the calibration seal. Every communication unit has its own user manual. external tariff control via control inputs Energy and demand tariffs. since it is a complete unit in itself.4207 Type of circuit ZFD ZMD 3 4 10 05 C A Three-phase three-wire network (F circuit. additional functions and communication unit are not normally specified in the type designation in this user manual. integrated interface Energy tariffs. external tariff control via control inputs Energy tariffs. The communication unit is not a part of this type designation.1. 2.5 to IEC Active and reactive energy Active energy Measured quantities Design T R Complex tariff functions. internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs) Energy and demand tariffs. Aron circuit) Three-phase four-wire network (M circuit) Type of connection Direct connection with digital measuring system Transformer connection with digital measuring system Accuracy class 1 to IEC 0. internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs) All versions with 3 control inputs and 2 output contacts. extension board and communication unit (e. or . parametrization) • Inputs for recording fixed valency pulses (communication unit) • Output contacts (solid-state relays) for fixed valency pulses.External via control inputs (ZMD300xT21 and ZMD300xT41) . stored values.User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-9 . be determined by reading out the meter identification (see section 6. 2.by event signals based on monitored values as voltage. load profiles etc.hardware generation (series 2) the series designation S2 is printed on the nameplate directly after the type designation.Internal . etc.by integral time switch (ZMD300xT24 and ZMD300xT44) .by integrated ripple control receiver (extension board 0030/0430) • Display of data with a liquid crystal display (LCD) • Active and reactive power per phase and true RMS values of voltages and currents by means of digital signal processing (DSP) chips • Compliance with IEC accuracy class 1 for active energy consumption and class 1 for reactive energy (ZMD300CT) • Flexible measuring system through parametrization (definition of different variables by software) • Wide range of measurement from starting current to maximum current • Optical interface according to IEC 62056-21 and DLMS . however. For example by parametrizing from software version B20 the form of phase angle representation can be selected or from software version B21 operating messages for the occurrence of important events can be signalled to the power supply company as SMS messages. It can. (for ZMD300CT additionally power factor cosϕ) • Tariff control .1. current demand etc. • Extended functions such as monitoring functions.für die direkte Auslesung der Zählerdaten . Specific meter characteristics are present or not depending on the software version. sliding maximum demand.for service functions of meter. control signals and status messages • Installation aids H 71 0200 0136 d en . reactive and apparent energy in all four quadrants (ZMD300CT) or recording of active energy imported and exported (ZMD300AT) • Tariff system with energy and demand tariffs.8 "Data readout possibilities").5 Review of main characteristics ZMD300xT meters have the following basic characteristics: • Recording of active.ZMD300 AT / CT . Software version The software version stored in the meter cannot be recognised externally.g. • Interfaces such as CS. control of an arrow in the display. rotating field and direction of energy • Storage of event information. RS232.ZMD300 AT / CT . phase angles.User Manual Description of unit and technical data .g.. Event information can be read out via the available interfaces.Indication of phase voltages. Important events can be communicated to the power supply company as operating messages (sending of SMS messages. for remote transmission of data (communication unit) • Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present Landis+Gyr 2-10 H 71 0200 0136 d en . drive for an output contact. e. exceeding of thresholds or error messages.). modem. etc. RS485. voltage failures. etc. ........2.................. 120 A • Thermal ................. approx....................... if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.... 100 or 120 A Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted......2 Current values Basic current Ib ..................... 15 mA to 120 A Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted..............................User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-11 ... 10................................ Maximum measuring range ................................................................ZMD300 AT / CT .................. 80....................8 to 1........... 0.......................... 5000 A H 71 0200 0136 d en . selectable: 5....................2.2 2.............................. selectable: 40.. if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.................... Voltage range ...... not the starting current.......... to determine the starting limit..................5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used........................ 3 x 110/190 V to 3 x 240/415 V Note: This meter can also be operated with only one or two phases without loss of accuracy.... Starting current • According to IEC .15 x Un 2... 60..5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used.... 20 or 40 A Maximum current Imax ...2...............1 Technical data Voltage values Rated voltage Un • ZMD300xT ............ 0................. approx..............................3 % Ib Note: The meter uses the starting power...Permissible range ..... Loading capacity • Measurements ..... 0....5 % Ib • Typical ............ 120 A • Short-circuit ≤ 10 ms ...... ...... Hence accuracy class 1 applies also to the reactive part for ZMD300CT........................ 100 V Active power (typical) ...........03 VA 2....... 240 V Active power (typical) ...................................................6 Measuring accuracy Accuracy • Accuracy class to IEC 61036 ...... 2..........6 W .......8 VA .........8 W Apparent power (typical) ..... 0...8 VA • Current path (typical) .... 240 V .........4 Frequency values Rated frequency fn .....0 % Note: The combimeter ZMD300CT scarcely reveals higher measurement deviations for reactive energy as for active energy consumption.............. 10 A Apparent power (typical) .......................................... see 2................ 1..... 1............2...0 VA • For phase voltage (full load) .....................5 10 7 20 15 40 ............................... 100 V ..2.......... ± 1...........5 Power consumption Power consumption per phase Communication unit without CU with CU • For phase voltage (full load) .......... 1......3 Starting values Typical starting power at rated voltage of 230 V • Related to basic current Ib • M circuit approx...............5 VA ... Class 1 • Absolute accuracy active (with balanced load and cosϕ = 1) ............. 0..3 W Apparent power (typical) .............ZMD300 AT / CT ............2..... 0.. ± 1................... 50 or 60 Hz Frequency range ..................1 W ............................ Landis+Gyr 2-12 H 71 0200 0136 d en ........2........ 5 3........User Manual Description of unit and technical data ....2..... 0..............................2.........................0 % • Absolute accuracy reactive (ZMD300CT only)................................................................ 1....6 "Measuring accuracy" 2..........A 30 W The meter measures as soon as a phase reaches the specified starting power.. 1............... ................................................................................................... < 2 mA ohmic at 230 VAC Note: Same meter for all voltages by re-parametrization........................2............ 2 or 4 Hz ......... LCD liquid crystal display • Digit size value field ....... 8 mm • Number of positions value field .................User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-13 ............................................................................... typically 20 days • Battery (optional) .... 20 Hz • Pulse width ............ 1000 pulses per kWh or kvarh Test output active and reactive power (ZxD400xT) • Type .................................................................................. < 5 ppm Power reserve for bridging voltage interruptions • Supercap .............................8 Output values Display • Type ................ZMD300 AT / CT .... approx..................................................................................... solid-state relay • Voltage .....................9 Inputs and outputs Control inputs • Control voltage Ut .................... 12 to 240 VAC/VDC H 71 0200 0136 d en .................................................................2... 10 years Note: The power reserve of the battery is reduced if the LCD is repeatedly switched on by pressing the display buttons when no voltage is applied....maximum ....................... Output contacts • Type .....................................................7 Calendar clock Movement accuracy ...................................... 500.2...................... up to 8 • Digit size index field .........2................................. 2.................................................................... 2 or 40 ms 2......................................................... up to 8 Meter constant R • selectable ............................................ 6 mm • Number of positions index field ... LED red • Pulse frequency (dependent on meter constant R and measured value) .............................. 100 to 240 VAC • Current input ..........................at Un and 10 A ..........................................................1....... . 9600 Baud • Standards ........................................2................. bi-directional interface • Max........ service functions 2.User Manual Description of unit and technical data ...........11 Supplementary power supply Situated on extension board type 0250 • Nominal voltage range . 2..........................5 s t Fig.........................................................2 W 2.. after further 0..................... after approx.........................• Current .............................. 100 to 160 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC • Operation range ...........................5 s Un Bridging time Data saved Display switched off 0 after 0.12 Voltage behaviour Voltage interruption • Bridging time ..................................10 Serial interface Optical interface • Type ..............................................2.......... serial......... 80 to 115 % Un • Frequency range .............after 1 to 5 s* • Recognition of energy direction and phase voltage .....5 s • Data storage .................. 2....................2 s • Disconnection ............. 100 mA • Switching frequency .................7 s approx..2 Behaviour in event of voltage failure Restoration of voltage • Ready for service (depending on duration of failure) .............................. IEC 62056-21 and dlms (IEC 62056-42/46/53/61/62) • Application ............... according to IEC 0...................2...................................................... max....................... Data readout......... 2....... 50 Hz 2...... max... after 1 to 3 s* * operated with 3 phases Landis+Gyr 2-14 H 71 0200 0136 d en ..5 s 0..ZMD300 AT / CT .... baud rate ................................................... 50 or 60 Hz • Power consumption ................................... 2......... .1 In to Imax) ........for current and voltage circuits under load to IEC 62053-21/22/23 .... 1 kV • Radio interference suppression ..........13 External influences Temperature range • Operation ... -40 °C to +85 °C Temperature coefficient • Range .................... ± 0........................................... 4 kV ............................................ 4 kV at 50 Hz for 1 min H 71 0200 0136 d en ................................. 3 s max.................... IP 51 to IEC 60529 Electromagnetic compatibility • Electrostatic discharges .. 1 kV • Line transients (Surge)............. 4 kV ...2................................. 2..........................................................................................3 Behaviour when voltage restored 2....012 % per K • With cosϕ=1 (from 0..................................ZMD300 AT / CT ............................................... ± 0.... to IEC 61000-4-2 ... to IEC/CISPR 22 Class B Insulation strength ................for current and voltage circuits not under load ........................Un 0 Detection of energy direction and phase voltages max........03 % per K Protection class ....................... 5 s All functions available t Fig..................................................................................................... to IEC 61000-4-5 ...........02 % per K • With cosϕ=0........................... 15 kV • Electromagnetic high frequency fields ........for current and voltage circuits ................5 (from 0.......................User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-15 .............Contact discharges .............................................for auxiliary circuits > 40 V .................... 10 or 30 V per m • Line transients (Burst)..... to nach IEC 61000-4-3 ..80 MHz to 2 GHz .........05 In to Imax) ....................... from -25°C to +70°C • Typical mean value .............. ± 0................................... -25 °C to +70 °C • Storage ................................................................ 2 kV ..... to IEC 61000-4-4 ................................for auxiliary circuits > 40 V ...................... .....2/50µs mains connections ...................................................2/50µs control connections ..................... 40 mm free space • Long . 177 mm • Height (with short terminal cover) ................................................................................................5 kg External dimensions ............................................................................................ no free space • Standard .................................... 206 mm • Height (suspension eyelet covered) ..................................................................14 Weight and dimensions Weight ......................................................................................................................ZMD300 AT / CT ........................................................................... 150 mm Terminal cover • Short ...... 1...........................Impulse voltage strength • Impulse voltage 1............ 60 mm free space Landis+Gyr 2-16 H 71 0200 0136 d en ...User Manual Description of unit and technical data ....2.. comply with DIN 43857 • Width ....................................... 75 mm Suspension triangle • Height (suspension eyelet open) ....................5 mm • Depth .............. 244 mm • Height (with standard terminal cover) ............... approx............................................... 190 mm • Width ...... 6 kV 2............................................. 8 kV • Impulse voltage 1....... 281......... .....head diameter .........6... ODU contacts. 4 mm2 • Screw dimensions ............ 8...ZMD300 AT / CT ....(up to 120 A with conductor cross-section 35 mm2) • Maximum conductor cross-section ....... 9.................. to ISO-4757-1983 .5 190 ...................2/+0..................................... type Z.................. 0..cross-slot ............6 mm ...........................................5 mm for Imax up to 100 A .........06 mm • Tightening torque ............................ 25 mm2 (up to 80 A) • Minimum conductor cross-section ................... 2............... size 2...... 3 Nm • Adaptation to plug adapters for Geyer terminals........... Amphenol Tuchel plugs is ensured.......................cable ...............User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-17 281.....2.....15 Connections Phase connections • Type .............. max.........5 mm for Imax up to 80 A................................. 35 mm2 (up to 120 A) ......................................4 Meter dimensions (standard terminal cover) 2.......................... max..8 +0............................ 6.......slot ..2 75 206 150 177 40 26 75 Fig....................................... H 71 0200 0136 d en .strand ....... M6 x 14 . screw type terminals • Diameter ............................................... .......5 Terminal dimensions Landis+Gyr 2-18 H 71 0200 0136 d en ...... 19.. 1 A • Maximum voltage of inputs .....................5 Ø8 ..........5 14.......Other connections • Type .....User Manual Description of unit and technical data 15..........5 14...75 14....3 ...ZMD300 AT / CT ........ 250 V rØ 5o 9.5 14...................5 14............5 Fig........5 12 Spacings of terminal openings Spacings of terminal stampings for smaller conductors 19 16 13 16 13 16 13 13........... 2.....5 14............ screwless spring-loaded terminals • Maximum current of voltage outputs ........... 2 Control inputs / output contacts K1 K2 Basic version: 3 control inputs Beispiel: G E1 P1 mB 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal assignment and numbering of terminals for free parametrization 15 13 14 16 40 41 42 100 .3. 2.6 Connection diagram of measuring unit ZMD300xT 2.1 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks ZMD300xT 2 1 L1 L2 L3 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 x xx x x x Fig.3 Connection diagrams Binding connection diagrams Note The following connection diagrams should be considered examples.7 Connection diagram fixed control inputs / output contacts (example) H 71 0200 0136 d en . 2.ZMD300 AT / CT . 2.3.240 V Fig.2.User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-19 . The connection diagrams provided at the rear of the front door and visible when the door is open are always binding for the installation. 8 Connection diagram extension board with 4 control inputs and 2 output contacts (example) K3 K4 K5 K6 2400 Extension board 2400 2 control inputs G KA KB 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization 15 15 18 19 44 43 45 47 46 48 Fig.3.10 Connection diagram extension board with 6 output contacts (example) Landis+Gyr 2-20 H 71 0200 0136 d en .2.9 Connection diagram extension board with 2 control inputs and 4 output contacts (example) K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 0600 K3 Extension board 0600 no control inputs 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization 44 44 43 45 47 46 48 50 49 51 Fig. 2.User Manual Description of unit and technical data .3 4200 Extension board K3 K4 Extension board 4200 4 control inputs G KA KB G E2 P2 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal assignment and numbering of terminals for free parametrization 15 15 18 19 15 33 34 44 43 45 Fig. 2.ZMD300 AT / CT . 2. 0250 K3 K4 Extension board 0250 with supplementary power supply no control inputs 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) 61 61 64 64 54 53 55 Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization 100 . 160 V DC Fig.User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-21 .11 Connection diagram extension board with supplementary power supply (example) Extension board 0030 with ripple control receiver no control inputs no output contacts 0030 E 30 Lx Signal allocation for free parametrization Fig... 2..ZMD300 AT / CT .12 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver (example) K3 K4 K5 K6 0430 E Extension board 0430 with ripple control receiver no control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization 30 Lx 61 61 62 63 64 65 66 Fig.13 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and 4 output contacts (example) H 71 0200 0136 d en .. 240 V AC 100 . 2. 2. User Manual Description of unit and technical data .ZMD300 AT / CT .Landis+Gyr 2-22 H 71 0200 0136 d en . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL 3 Mechanical construction H 71 0200 0137 c en . 03.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.1999 18.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 3-2 H 71 0200 0137 c en .2002 01.07.ZMD300 AT / CT .Revision history Index − a b c Date 26.04.2003 Comments First edition Terminals of extension board adapted ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH .05.User Manual Revision history .2002 31. ZMD300 AT / CT .Table of contents 3 3.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 3-3 .2 3.1 3.3 Mechanical construction _____________________________ 3-5 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 Face plate _________________________________________________ 3-10 H 71 0200 0137 c en . ZMD300 AT / CT .Landis+Gyr 3-4 H 71 0200 0137 c en .User Manual Table of contents . since they are protected following calibration and official certification on delivery by a manufacturer and calibration seal.1 Meter ZMD300xT 1 Combined suspension hanger (open or concealed) 2 Screw with manufacturer seal 3 Optical test output reactive energy consumption (red).ZMD300 AT / CT . to exchange the tariff face plate with connection diagram or to fit or remove a communication unit (see fig. Case The internal construction of the meters is not described here. 3.2 and separate user manuals for the communication units available). 3. ZMD300CT only 4 Optical test output active energy consumption (red) 5 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 6 Optical interface 7 Screw with calibration seal 8 Front section with main face plate 9 Display button "up" 10 Display button "down" 11 Front door with tariff face plate 12 Upper part of case 13 14 15 16 Lower part of case Company seal for front door Terminal cover Terminal cover screws with company seals H 71 0200 0137 c en . It is not permitted to open the meters after delivery.User Manual Mechanical construction Landis+Gyr 3-5 . 1 2 3 4 5 8 11 6 7 9 10 12 13 14 16 15 16 Fig. The front door is only secured with a company seal and can be opened to operate the reset button. to change the battery.1 Mechanical construction This section describes the mechanical construction of the ZMD300xT meter. The following drawing shows the meter components visible from outside.3 3. ZMD300 AT / CT . To fit or remove the communication unit the terminal cover must also be removed.User Manual Mechanical construction .The front door must be opened to give access to the battery compartment. 3. 3. this is replaced by a dummy case. 1 2 3 Fig.3 Meter with communication unit withdrawn If the meter has no communication unit. reset button and tariff face plate. Landis+Gyr 3-6 H 71 0200 0137 c en .2 Meter with front door open 1 Battery compartment 2 Reset button R 3 Communication unit or dummy Fig. 3. which is easy to install. • Now turn the seal component until it is horizontal and slide it down into position 2 as illustrated. as shown. (position 1) until it contacts the rear wall. The two bulges firmly fix the seal component into the lateral grooves. R Reset button Battery compartment Compartment for communication unit Seal component Recess for transformer plate Front door open Fig. allows the use of a standard padlock instead of an utility seal. H 71 0200 0137 c en .User Manual Mechanical construction Landis+Gyr 3-7 .5 Stowage of seal component when not in use The seal component is installed as follows: • Slide the seal component into the vertical slot at an angle.Seal component An additional component. 3.4 Front door sealing using a padlock The seal component is stowed away in a holder under the front door when not in use. Front door Seal component inserted Padlock Fig.ZMD300 AT / CT . Two company seals in the fixing screws of the terminal cover prevent unauthorized access to the phase connections and therefore to unrecorded current consumption.User Manual Mechanical construction .ZMD300 AT / CT .Seal component insert in position 1 Front door and turn in position 2 Position 1 Position 2 Side view Front view Fig. 3.2 Connections Fig.7 Meter with terminal cover removed (example ZMD300CT) The terminal block with all meter connections is situated under the terminal cover. Landis+Gyr 3-8 H 71 0200 0137 c en .6 Seal component for use with padlock 3. 3. ZMD300 AT / CT . 3.User Manual Mechanical construction Landis+Gyr 3-9 . tapped from the relevant phase input • 3 fixed control inputs with a common return line G (electrically isolated) • 2 output contacts for transferring fixed valency pulses or control signals (electrically isolated) The lower row of terminals comprises the phase connections with input and output of the circuit for each phase with the voltage connection in between and neutral conductor at far right. Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board Pulse inputs Communication interfaces Communication unit U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs L1 L2 L3 N Phase connections Fig.8 Terminal layout ZMD300xT H 71 0200 0137 c en . U2. U3 and N.The top row of terminals (level 1) consists of spring-loaded terminals and Terminal layout (example ZMD300xT) comprises • Extension board terminals on the left depending on version up to 4 control inputs or 6 output contacts or a combination of these with maximum 6 inputs and outputs. voltage connections for a separate supply or test input of the ripple control receiver • Communication unit terminals on the right The center row of terminals (level 0) likewise consists of spring-loaded terminals and comprises • Voltage outputs U1. serial number. 1 4 5 6 9 Three-phase four-wire meter ZMD310CT41.3 Face plate The face plate is divided into two parts and is designed to customer specifications. 73 994 032 10(80) A 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 2000 10 11 12 Fig.User Manual Mechanical construction .3. 1 2 3 Landis+Gyr Dialog Readout Cl. year of construction) 10 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 11 Arrows for present status indication 12 Status indication The operating elements and displays are described more fully in section 5.4207 Nr. It contains all relevant data about the meter. which is secured by a calibration seal. Recesses permit operation of the display buttons "down" and "up" for control of the liquid crystal display.ZMD300 AT / CT .9 T1 T2 T3 SET Test 7 8 Main face plate (example ZMD310CT) 1 Optical test output reactive energy (with accuracy class – ZMD300CT only) 2 Meter constant R1 (referred to primary values) or R2 3 Optical test output active energy (with accuracy class) 4 Optical interface 5 Approval symbol 6 Type of connection 7 Display button "up" / Display button "down" 8 Symbol for dual protective insulation 9 Meter data (type designation. Landis+Gyr 3-10 H 71 0200 0137 c en . 1 imp kvarh 1000 kWh imp Cl. Main face plate The main face plate is situated under the plastic viewing window. rated values. 3. 1..0 8.5.T 6.6.0 7.0 Reset counter 0.0 S02 73 994 032 +A -A 1.0 6.T 5.5.T 2. which can be swung out sideways to the left and is secured by a company seal.5..0 Identification 0.0 6.9.8.0 5.8.9.0 +Rc 6.0 7.0 1.T 7.0 8.2 Date C.4.6.2.0 2.0 Pmax cumulated Last tm/P running Plast integr.0 -Ri 7.0 Battery hours counter 2:1.0 7.8. The connection diagram of the meter is shown on the back of the face plate and is therefore visible with the front door open.8.0 6.2.0 5.4. 1 2 8.5.6.2.0 6.8.2.0 1.8.0 2.5.8.0 7.0 1.8.8.4.4. 3.0 8.8.0 -Rc 8.2.0 1.0 S01 3:1.0 5.0 T = Energy tariff S01: 1 imp = 10 Wh S02: 1 imp = 10 Wh +Ri 5.6.T 8.F Functional error 0.6.1 Time-of-day 0. period Pmax Energy Total energy 3 5 Ownership designation K1: 1 imp K2: 1 imp K3: 1 imp K4: 1 imp K5: 1 imp K6: 1 imp = 10 Wh (+A) = 10 Wh (-A) = 10 varh (+Ri) = 10 varh (+Rc) = 10 varh (-Ri) = 10 varh (-Rc) 4 6 Fig.8.ZMD300 AT / CT .8.Tariff face plate The tariff face plate is placed in the front door.0 1. Display check F.4.6.User Manual Mechanical construction Landis+Gyr 3-11 .0 2.2.6.0 2.8.5.8.10 Tariff face plate (example ZMD310CT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 General data appearing in the display Measured quantities Pulse input data Output contact data Ownership designation Communication unit data (if present) H 71 0200 0137 c en .0 5.8.0 8.4.T 2. Landis+Gyr 3-12 H 71 0200 0137 c en .ZMD300 AT / CT .User Manual Mechanical construction . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4 Function H 71 0200 0021 e en . Feldstrasse 1 CH .Revision history Index − a b c d e Date 26.05.1 integrated (H 71 0200 0022 omitted) Landis+Gyr Ltd.1 added (H 71 0200 0022 cancelled) Section 4.1-2 H 71 0200 0021 e en .1999 17. Chapter "Monitoring functions" added. section 4.06.com Landis+Gyr 4.2003 30.landisgyr. Several changes New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Chapter 4.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2003 Comments First edition Chapter "VDEW functions" removed.2003 01.2000 29.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .16 new.07.04.User Manual Revision history .09.2000 31.03. 2 4.7 4.4.2-9 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.1-11 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.2 4.4-10 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.1.1-10 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.11 4.1-10 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1.1-11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-10 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-11 Extension board __________________________________________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.3 4.1 4.4.4 4.4-6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.1.3.1.4 4.5 Function ________________________________________ 4.9 4.3.8 4.3 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.2 4.8 4.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.4-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.1.5-5 Landis+Gyr 4.4.1-7 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1.4-5 Time base _______________________________________________ 4.1-7 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.2-7 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents .4.1 4.10 4.2.10 4.4 4.4-5 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.6 4.4.5 4.1-11 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.9 4.1.3.12 4.1 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.1 4.1-7 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.3 4.1-9 Signal processing _________________________________________ 4.2 4.1.4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.1.3 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.3-6 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.1-12 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.4.3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.4.4-8 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.1.4-6 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.3.6 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.1.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .1.4.5 4.3 4.2.Table of contents 4 4.1-3 H 71 0200 0021 e en .4.1 4.7 4.1-12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.4 4.2.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.3-11 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.2 4. 6.5-7 Tariff control via ripple control receiver _________________________ 4.3 4.9.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.5.User Manual Table of contents .6.8 4.3 4.2 4.1-4 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8.3 4.1 4.7 4.4 4.8 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.6.8.8-10 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.8-10 Formation of stored values__________________________________ 4.3 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.5 4.9-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions _________________________________________ 4.5 4.7 4.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.8 4.6 4.7.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data ________________ 4.2 4.6-12 Tariff control ______________________________________________ 4.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9.6.8.7-5 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.8-7 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.7 4.9 4.7.9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.10 Landis+Gyr 4.7-8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.9.6.1 4.3 4.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .4 4.6.6.9.9.4 4.9.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.8-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.6-5 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.2 4.1 4.1 4.7-7 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.8.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.8-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.4.8.9 4.1 4.6 4.9.9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.7.9.9.9 4.8-12 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period __________________ 4.5.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6 4.8.4 4.6.2 4.8.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.9.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.6 4.5 4.7 4.8 4.9-19 H 71 0200 0021 e en .5.6.8.2 4.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.7.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4. 15 4.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12.14-9 Security system __________________________________________ 4.2 4.9.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.4 4.7 4.1-5 .2 4.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.15.12.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.1 4.5 4.13-13 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.11 4.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.14-8 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.10-9 Display and readout______________________________________ 4.15-9 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16.3 4.1 4.10-10 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .5 4.10.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.13.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.3 4.10.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.14.15.4 4.13.14-7 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14.10 4.13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.14.16.15-6 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.16.13 4.2 4.6 4.2 4.3 4.3 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.2 4.13.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.1 4.12 4.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.3 4.16-8 H 71 0200 0021 e en .15.16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.3 4.14.11.16-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.15.11 4.9-19 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.2 4.14 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.11-5 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.14.1 4.10.16 4.4 4.12-6 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.4.1 4.4 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.1 4.12.10.12.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.1 4.14.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.15.14. 1-6 H 71 0200 0021 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 4. Two different block schematic diagrams are therefore shown below.4 Function The method of operation of the ZMD300 and ZxD400 meters is described in separate documents in sections 4. These are not specially mentioned here. 4. • Owing to the different kind of connection the current sensors for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters are shunts with series connected voltage transformers. 4.16 (for document numbers refer to the relevant operating instructions (overall contents list) for the relevant meter). Individual function blocks are described in the following chapters more fully if necessary for understanding.1 Overview This chapter provides a survey of the function of ZMD300xx und ZxD400xx meters based on a block schematic diagram. ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). H 71 0200 0021 e en . while the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters record the active and reactive energy consumption in all four quadrants. First some basic differences between the various types of meters: • The ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT and ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters differ in their form of communication interfaces (modular or integrated).1-7 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2 to 4. in those of the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters internal current transformers. ZMD and ZFD meters Note The following explanations refer exclusively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters).1 Block schematic diagram The method of operation of the meters will first be briefly explained with the aid of the block schematic diagram.1. • The ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters record the active energy consumption imported and exported. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks. 2 Block schematic diagram ZMD300xR / ZMD400xR Landis+Gyr 4.1.1-8 H 71 0200 0021 e en .ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT The ZMD300xT direct connection meters and the ZxD400xT transformer connection meters can be fitted with modular communication interfaces in a communication unit.1 Block schematic diagram ZMD300xT / ZMD400xT ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR The ZMD300xR direct connection meters and the ZxD400xR transformer connection meters can be fitted with a maximum of one integrated communication interface (RS232.1. 4. RS485 or CS) on the interface board.User Manual Function . RS485 or CS interface Measuring system Power supply Voltage monitor Memory.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . which can be exchanged or used in the field as required. Load profile Communication unit with interfaces and pulse inputs Fig. 4. Reset Calendar clock Time switch Control inputs Current sensors Voltage dividers A/D Microprocessor Signal utilization Tariff control Display buttons Data for billing LCD display Optical interface Optical test outputs Ut I1 I2 I3 U1 U2 U3 N Signal processing Extension board Inputs/outputs RCR (Supplementary power supply) Output contacts Measuring system Power supply Voltage monitor Memory. Load profile Inputs/outputs RCR (Supplementary power supply) Fig. Reset Calendar clock Time switch Control inputs Current sensors Voltage dividers A/D Microprocessor Signal utilization Tariff control Display buttons Data for billing LCD display Optical interface Optical test outputs Ut I1 I2 I3 U1 U2 U3 N Signal processing Extension board Outputcontacts Interface board with RS232. Inputs The main inputs to the meter are: • Connections of phase voltages (U1. optical interface) . presence of phase voltages and identification number) • Optical test outputs (red. • Push buttons .for processing in the measuring system .Resetting .1-9 . U2. H 71 0200 0021 e en . plus up to 4 others on extension board) for: .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Synchronizing Opto-couplers protect the following circuit from interference. I2. I3) and neutral conductor N . phase currents (I1. Analogue-digital transformers digitize these values and feed them as instantaneous digital values via calibration stages to a signal processor. plus up to 6 others on the extension board) • Optical interface for automatic local data acquisition by suitable acquisition unit (handheld terminal) • Communication interfaces of various kinds (in the communication unit for the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT or on the interface board in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR) 4.for the three-phase power supply to the meter and voltage monitor • Control inputs Ut (3 fixed.for display control (display buttons. such as energy direction. U3).2 Measuring system The input circuits (voltage dividers and current shunts with voltage transformer for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters or voltage dividers and current transformers for the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters) record voltage and current in the individual phases. 2 in combimeters) • Static relay with freely parametrized signal assignment (2 fixed. type of energy.for resetting or service functions (reset button) • Pulse inputs for external pulse transmitters (only for ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT group meters in the communication unit) Outputs The meter has the following outputs: • LCD liquid crystal display with display buttons for local reading of billing data (single 8-digit display with additional information. 1 in active energy meters.1.Changeover of energy and demand tariffs . which could otherwise enter via the control inputs.Demand inhibition . 1. sum and individual phases.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . individual phases and mean value) • Phase voltages • Phase currents and neutral current • Direction of rotating field 4.4. separated according to energy direction) • Power factors cos ϕ (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx.5 Tariff control Tariff control is performed: • Externally via control inputs (3 fixed.1-10 H 71 0200 0021 e en .1.4 Signal utilization For signal utilization in the various registers the microprocessor scans the measured quantities every second to determine the following measured values: • Active energy (sum and individual phases.3 Signal processing The signal processor determines the following measured quantities from the instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase and forms their mean value over one second: • Active power per phase • Reactive power per phase (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) • Phase voltages • Phase currents • Mains frequency • Phase angles 4. sum and individual phases.1. separated according to energy direction. plus up to 4 others on the extension board) • Internally by time switch and calendar clock • Internally by the ripple control receiver for integration with the extension board • By event signals based on threshold values of the monitoring functions Landis+Gyr 4. separated according to energy direction.User Manual Function . assigned to the 4 quadrants) • Apparent energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. if required in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx also assigned to the 4 quadrants) • Reactive energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. 4. 4.4. whereby the phase voltage can vary over the entire voltage range without the supply voltage having to be adjusted. 4.7 Memory A non-volatile flash memory serves to record a load profile and also contains the configuration and parametrization data of the meter and secures the billing data against loss from voltage failures.1. It can contain the following components: • up to 4 control inputs in combination with • up to 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) • a ripple control receiver • a supplementary power supply H 71 0200 0021 e en .6 Data preparation for billing The following registers are available for evaluation of the individual measured values: • 24 for energy tariffs • 8 for total energy • 8 for running mean demand values • 24 for demand tariffs • 2 for power factors cosϕ (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) • others for values of voltage and current. mains frequency and phase angles 4. It cannot be exchanged.10 Extension board The extension board is fitted inside the meter and is therefore secured by the calibration seals. The supplementary power supply connected in parallel with the normal power supply ensures operation of the meter free from interruption.1. Since the meter normally obtains its supply from the measuring voltage.1. it is similarly switched off and cannot be read.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.8 Power supply The supply voltages for the meter electronics are obtained from the threephase network.9 Supplementary power supply For medium or high-voltage applications in particular the measuring voltage can be switched off. so that it can be read at any time.1-11 . The supplementary power supply is situated on an extension board.1. A voltage monitor ensures correct operation and reliable data recovery in the event of a voltage interruption and correct restarting when the voltage is restored.1. RS232. is therefore secured by a company seal and can be exchanged or inserted in the field if necessary.11 Communication unit The communication unit for fitting only in the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT meters is a complete unit in its own case.1-12 H 71 0200 0021 e en .User Manual Function .1. RS485. Depending on the version. it contains • an RS232 interface. • an RS485 interface or • a CS interface Landis+Gyr 4. If present.4. It contains: • Communication interfaces as required for remote scanning of the meter (e. CS.g. it is situated under the front door.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .1. modem) • 2 signal inputs (S0 interfaces) for processing external pulse transmitters 4.12 Interface board The interface board only present in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters is permanently fitted in the meter and therefore secured with the calibration seal. 2 Measuring unit H 71 0200 0023 c en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 04.09.04.03.1999 17.2003 Comments First edition Front page and revision history added Several changes Terminology revision New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.2002 31.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .landisgyr.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2000 29.com Landis+Gyr 4.Revision history Index − − a b c Date 26. Feldstrasse 1 CH .07.2000 18.2-2 H 71 0200 0023 c en .User Manual Revision history . 2-7 Formation of measured quantities _____________________________ 4.2.3 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-9 H 71 0200 0023 c en .2.2.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.Table of contents 4.1 4.2 4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2-3 . Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents .2-4 H 71 0200 0023 c en . I2 and I3 • Mains frequency fn Signal preparation H 71 0200 0023 c en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Fig.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.1 Block schematic diagram of measuring unit Input signals Signal conversion The meter has the analogue current values I1.2. etc. Px. U2 and U3 available as input signals. Qx. Ux A/D instantaneous digital values ix. etc. I2 and I3 and analogue voltage values U1. U3 • Phase currents I1. The meter measuring system generates calibrated instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase from the analogue input signals.4. Measured quantities Microprocessor ±A.2. neutral current I0 • Phase angles between voltages U1 and U2 as well as U1 and U3 • Phase angles between voltage U1 and currents I1. P2 and P3 (with sign for direction of energy) • Reactive powers Q1. Q2 and Q3 (with sign for direction of energy.2-5 . These are not specially mentioned here. the generation from the analogue input signals of all digital measured quantities required in the meter. I3.e. ±R.1 Survey analogue input signals Ix. i. only in combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx) • Phase voltages U1. U2. ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). 4. ZMD and ZFD meters Note The following explanations refer − unless otherwise mentioned − exclusively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters). I2. 4. The signal processor of the meter determines the following digital mean values (averaged for one second in each case) from the instantaneous values of voltage and current in each phase: • Active powers P1. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks. Ux. ux Signal processor digital mean values Ix.2 Measuring unit This sub-chapter explains all functions of the measuring unit in detail. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .I2 .U3 I1 .U2 .2-6 H 71 0200 0023 c en .U3 I1 . the individual phases themselves.U2 / U1 . it can record the sum of the three phases. data for the individual phases in the ZFD400xx are specifically not provided. ZMD400xx L1 U1 I1 L1 L2 L3 N I3 U3 L3 I2 U2 L2 Fig.User Manual Function . 4.I3 I0 fn ϕU ϕ U-I yes U1 .I2 .U32 I1 .U3 yes yes ZFD400Cx Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Mean value U12 .U32 I1 .U3.Signal processing Measured quantity Active power import Active power export Reactive power positive Reactive power negative The microprocessor calculates the following measured quantities from the mean values provided by the signal processor: ZMD300Cx ZMD400Cx +A –A +R –R +Ri –Rc –Ri +Rc +VA –VA cosϕ Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Phases / mean value U1 .U3 yes yes ZFD400Ax Sum Sum – – – – – – – – – U12 .U2 . the phase angle between voltage and current as well as the angle between voltages U1 .U2 and U1 .I3 I0 yes U1 . The following diagrams show the differences between the ZMD400xx and the ZFD400xx.2 Type of measurement ZMD400xx Since the ZMD400xx measures the individual phases mutually independently with one measuring element each.2. Landis+Gyr 4.U2 / U1 .I3 – yes – – yes ZMD300Ax ZMD400Ax Sum / Phases Sum / Phases – – – – – – – – – U1 .I3 – yes – – yes Reactive power 1st quadrant Reactive power 2nd quadrant Reactive power 3rd quadrant Reactive power 4th quadrant Apparent power import Apparent power export Power factor Phase voltages Phase currents Neutral current Mains frequency Phase angle voltages Phase angle voltage-current Direction of rotating field Owing to the different type of measurement of the Aron circuit. U2 and U3 (58 to 240 V) applied to the meter to a proportionate amount of a few mV (UU) for further processing. 4.ZFD400xx cos ϕ = 1 L1 L2 L3 L1 U12 I1 L3 U32 L2 I3 Fig. 4. 4. Input circuits High resistance voltage dividers reduce the voltages U1. It cannot therefore form any actual single-phase values. also of a few mV (UI). H 71 0200 0023 c en . i q = u*. I2 and I3 to the meter (0 to 10 A) for further processing. In addition. The following voltage transformer forms voltages proportional to the input currents likewise of several mV (UI) and simultaneously separates the measuring circuit from the meter electronics. In the ZMD300xx meters for direct connection the phase currents pass through a high precision resistor in the current loop. i : calibrated instantaneous values of voltage and current U2 p = u.2. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks. i A/D Converter Digital filter Calibration u u Px p : instantaneous active power q : instantaneous reactive power u* : voltage displaced 90 tn : zero passage times o (Qx) ϕU ϕ U-I fn tn Fig. together with the corresponding linked voltage U12 or U32. The secondary currents of these current transformers develop voltages proportional to the input currents across resistors.3 Type of measurement ZFD400xx The ZFD400xx with Aron circuit records with its two measuring elements a phase current I1 or I3 each.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2 Signal conversion and processing Ix A/D Converter Digital filter Calibration i i I2 Formation of mean values per second Ix digital values Ux analogue input signals Ux u.2.2-7 . In the ZxD400xx meters for transformer connection internal current transformers reduce the input currents I1. This voltage transformer is also insensitive to direct currents up to 100 A. the phase angles between voltage and current always have an additional angle of 30° and are therefore not representative.4 Principle of signal processor There is no calculation of reactive power Q by the ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters.2. A following calibration stage compensates for the natural errors of the voltage divider or current transformer. Landis+Gyr 4. I . The values U and I are obtained from these by extracting the root.Digitizing The analogue signals UU and UI are digitized in analogue-digital converters and then filtered. I2 and I3. 4. IQ I Calculation per phase of ϕ IP U P = U . U1 U2 U3 Time measurement for rotating field. 4. The times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the other phase voltages U2 and U3 serves to determine the phase angle between the voltages and of the rotating field.2-8 H 71 0200 0023 c en .2. sin ϕ Fig. which the following microprocessor scans at intervals of one second. Mean value formation The signal processor works at a high clock frequency in the kHz range.5 Power calculation For the instantaneous value of reactive power q (only formed by the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters) the instantaneous value of voltage u must be rotated through 90° before multiplication (the reactive component is the product of the voltage component with the current component vertical to the voltage). I . phase angle 1 : TU1-U2 2 : TU1-U3 1 2 3 3 : TU1-U1 (fn) Fig. Time measurement The mains frequency can be calculated from the time measured between two zero passages (change from negative to positive value of voltage U1). so that no further adjustment is necessary in the subsequent processing. frequency. For further processing of the individual signal it generates mean values over one second. Power calculation The instantaneous value of active power p is produced by multiplying the instantaneous values of voltage u and current i (the active component corresponds to the product of voltage component with the current component parallel to the voltage).User Manual Function .6 Time measurement The phase angle between voltage and current is determined by the times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the phase currents I1.2. Calibrated digital instantaneous values of voltage (u) and current (i) for all three phases are then available as intermediate values for the formation of the required values in the signal processor. The squares of voltage and current are obtained by multiplying the instantaneous values of voltage and current by themselves. cos ϕ Q = U .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.2. Mean values per second Q1 Q2 Q3 Measured quantities Σ +R -R Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Q2 and Q3.7 Reactive power The reactive power values of the individual phases ±R1.2. H 71 0200 0023 c en .8 Total reactive power The microprocessor can allocate the reactive power to the 4 quadrants in the combimeters from the signs of R and A: • Reactive power in 1st quadrant: +Ri • Reactive power in 2nd quadrant: +Rc • Reactive power in 3rd quadrant: -Ri • Reactive power in 4th quadrant: -Rc In the same way he can allocate the reactive powers of the individual phases to the 4 quadrants. By summating the mean values of reactive power Q1. 4. The measured values are fed directly to the following registers to record the energy and the maximum demand (in combimeters also of minimum power factor). Mean values per second P1 P2 P3 Measured quantities Σ Total active power +A (Import) -A (Export) Fig. P2 and P3 the microprocessor calculates the total active power import +A or the total active power export -A. Active power The active powers in the individual phases ±A1. the microprocessor calculates the total positive reactive power +R or the total negative reactive power -R. These energy components are scaled by the microprocessor corresponding to the meter constant and are then available as measured quantities for selection of measured value.3 Formation of measured quantities By scanning the mean values of active P and in combimeters also reactive Q powers every second. 4. Q2 and Q3. By summating the mean values of active power P1. ±A2 and ±A3 are formed directly from the mean values of active power P1. energy components are produced (Ws or vars) at fixed intervals (every second) and with varying energy magnitudes or demand. P2 and P3.2-9 .2. ±R2 and ±R3 are obtained in the combimeters directly from the mean values of reactive power Q1. Calculation method 1 (vectorial addition) From the mean values P1. Mean values per second P1 P2 P3 Q1 Q2 Q3 Measured quantities Σ Σ (P1 + P2 + P3) +VA (import) -VA (export) (P1 + P2 + P3) + (Q1 + Q2 + Q3) 2 2 (Q1 + Q2 + Q3) Fig.9 4-quadrant measurement The quadrants are numbered from top right as 1st quadrant (+A/+Ri) anticlockwise to the 4th quadrant (+A/-Rc) at bottom right.2. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .+R + kvarh +Rc Quadrant II +Ri Quadrant I + kvarh Export . 4. Apparent power The apparent power is calculated in the combimeters in two ways: • by geometric addition of the active and reactive power of the individual phases • by multiplying the rms values of voltage and current of the individual phases The method of calculation can be parametrized (only one possible in each case).10 Total apparent power according to calculation type 1 Landis+Gyr 4.kvarh -R Fig.kWh -A Quadrant III -Ri +A Quadrant IV -Rc .2-10 H 71 0200 0023 c en .User Manual Function .kvarh Import + kWh . P2 and P3 and Q1. Q2 and Q3 the microprocessor calculates the apparent power of the individual phases ±VA1.2. ±VA2 and ±VA3 as well as the total apparent power ±VA. I2rms.Calculation method 2 (from rms values) From the mean values U1rms. U2 and U3. ±VA2 and ±VA3 and summates these for the total apparent power ±VA. I1rms U1 rms +VA (Import) Σ –VA (Export) Fig.2. Phase currents Neutral current i1 i3 i0 i2 i0 = i1 + i2 + i3 (geometrical addition) Fig.2-11 . i2 and i3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2.12 Neutral current I0 Mains frequency The signal processor calculates the mains frequency fn by forming the reciprocal from the time tU1-U1 between two zero passages of voltage U1.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. I2rms and I3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the currents by extracting the root and directly from these the phase currents I1. 4. U3rms and I1rms. The rms values of the currents I1rms. U2 rms VA2 Measured quantities VA1 . The signal processor calculates the instantaneous neutral current i0 by adding the instantaneous phase currents i1. H 71 0200 0023 c en .11 Total apparent power according to calculation type 2 (ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) Power factor cosϕ The power factor cosϕ is calculated bei den Kombizählern as follows: cos ϕ = P S The meter uses the method of calculation employed for calculating the apparent power. Phase voltages The rms values of the voltages U1rms. 4. U3rms VA3 I2rms. U2rms. Mean values per second I1 rms U1rms I2 rms U2 rms I3rms U3 rms I3rms. I3rms the microprocessor calculates by multiplication the apparent power of the individual phases ±VA1. I2 and I3. U2rms and U3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the voltages by extracting the root and directly from these the phase voltages U1. U3 I3 U3 (240°) I3 U1 I2 U2 Fig. Otherwise they flash every second.13 Phase angle case 1 I2 U2 (120°) I1 I1 Case 2: The voltage angles are displayed as in case 1. 4.14 Phase angle case 2 Direction of rotating field The direction of the rotating field is calculated by the microprocessor based on the phase angle of the 3 voltages.2-12 H 71 0200 0023 c en . The values of the angles are always positive and can be from 0 to 360°. 4. The signal processor calculates the phase angle between voltage U1 and current per phase from the times tU1-I1. These can be selected by parametrizing. tU1-U2 and tU1-U3 between zero passages of the various voltages. Landis+Gyr 4.Phase angles The signal processor calculates the phase angles between voltages U1-U2 and U1-U3 from the times tU1-U1. tU1-I2 and tU1-I3 between zero passages of the voltage U1 and the phase currents.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Case 1: All voltage and current angles are displayed clockwise with reference to the voltage in phase 1. 2 forms of representation are available for displaying the phase angle.User Manual Function . the phase voltage indications L1. with reference to the associated phase voltage and can have values between -180° and +180°.2. If the direction of rotation corresponds to that specified by the parametrizing. The angles of the currents are displayed. however.2. U3 I3 U3-I3 U3 (240°) U1 U1-I1 I2 U2-I2 I1 U2 (120°) U2 Fig. L2 and L3 are continuously lit. 3 Inputs and outputs H 71 0200 0036 f en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 2002 02.04.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2000 18. extension board 600x with 6 control inputs cancelled Chapter 6.04.2002 31.05.landisgyr.07.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .1999 17.09.User Manual Revision history .5 additionally ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH .2000 29.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Several changes ZxD210AT replaced with ZxD410AT.2002 22.Revision history Index − a b c d e f Date 26.com Landis+Gyr 4.03.3-2 H 71 0200 0036 f en .04. 3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3 4.2 4.3.3-3 .3-6 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.Table of contents 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.1 4.3.3-11 H 71 0200 0036 f en .4 Inputs and outputs_________________________________________ 4.3 4.3. User Manual Table of contents .3-4 H 71 0200 0036 f en .Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4.4.1 Terminal layout The terminals are arranged as shown as seen from below in the various types of meter.3.3.2 Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xR meter for direct connection with permanently integrated communication (interface board) H 71 0200 0036 f en .3. 4. ZMD300xT Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x) Communication unit (Terminals T2-x) Pulse Communication inputs interfaces U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) L1 L2 L3 N Phase connections Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.3-5 .1 Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xT meter for direct connection with modular communication (exchangeable communication unit. The functions of the terminals are likewise shown on the drawings.3 Inputs and outputs This sub-chapter describes all inputs and outputs of ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx meters and provides instructions for the definition of terminal functions and terminal labelling. example CU-A1) ZMD300xR Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x) Interface board (Terminals T2-x) Communication interface U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) L1 L2 L3 N Phase connections Fig. 4. 3-6 .3 Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xT meter for transformer connection with modular communication (exchangeable communication unit) ZxD400xR Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x) Interface board (Terminals T2-x) Communication interface U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) N Voltage connections Current connections I1 U1 I1 I2 U2 I2 I3 U3 I3 Fig.3.2 Parametrizing the terminal designations Definitions for the terminal designations are required for all terminals available in the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software. which is then printed at the relevant terminal during the equipment manufacturing process.e.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.3.4 Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xR meter for transformer connection with permanently integrated communication (interface board) 4.3.ZxD400xT Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x) Communication unit (Terminals T2-x) Pulse Communication inputs interfaces U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) N Voltage connections Current connections I1 U1 I1 I2 U2 I2 I3 U3 I3 Fig. In the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software the terminals are provided with the following symbolic designation: • T0-1 to T0-n • T1-1 to T1-n for terminals of the basic version for terminals of the extension board H 71 0200 0036 f en . i. a terminal number must be defined for every terminal. 4. 4.3 Terminal designations It should be noted for the current and voltage connections that terminal designations for the actual connection terminals for current and voltage (numbers 1 . In the following connection diagrams the terminals for which the designations can be changed are shaded. H 71 0200 0036 f en .3-7 . Function Common connection Energy tariff input Energy tariff input Energy tariff input Integration period control G E1 E2 E3 mB Landis+Gyr 40 41 42 49 45 50 43 44 20 21 22 23 46 47 48 VDEW / DIN 15 13 33 not defined 17 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 14 34 not defined Time-of-day synchronization Synch 15 Reset control Reset control S0-input S0-input S0-input S0-input Demand tariff input Demand tariff input Demand tariff input KA KB S0 1+ S0 1S0 2+ S0 2P1 P2 P3 There is no standardization for the assignment and designation of the output contacts. Terminal designations are always numerical with a maximum of 2 digits.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.• T2-1 to T2-n for terminals of the communication unit or interface board These symbolic designations must be supplemented when parametrized. Individual terminal designations are possible exclusively for the screwless spring-loaded terminals.3. Standardization The table below shows typical terminal designations for the input terminals as used according to VDEW/DIN or selected by Landis+Gyr.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .11) are engraved on the terminal block and cannot be altered. where permitted. with the relevant terminal designations required by the customer. 7 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD300xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1. 3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3-8 H 71 0200 0036 f en . 9.User Manual Function . 4. 6.3.6 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD400xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 11 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6 ZMD300xx T0 T0 -1 -2 1 3 4 T0 -3 6 7 T0 -4 9 10 T0 T0 -5 -6 12 Fig.ZFD400xx T0 T0 -1 -2 1 2 3 5 T0 -3 7 8 T0 -4 9 T0 T0 -5 -6 Fig. 4. 7.5 Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZFD400xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 9 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6 ZMD400xx T0 T0 -1 -2 1 2 3 4 5 T0 -3 6 7 8 T0 -4 9 11 T0 T0 -5 -6 Fig. 4.3.3. 4. 10 and 12 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6 Landis+Gyr 4. 4.9 Example of a connection diagram for the 4200 extension board K3 K4 K5 K6 2400 Extension board 2400 2 control inputs G KA KB T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4 Fig.10 Example of a connection diagram for the 2400 extension board H 71 0200 0036 f en .3.3.8 Example of a connection diagram for control inputs and output contacts of basic version K3 K4 4200 Extension board 4200 4 control inputs G KA KB G E2 P2 T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4 Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3.3-9 . 4.K1 K2 Basic version: 3 control inputs G E1 P1 mB T0 T0 T0 T0 -7 -8 -9 -10 T0 T0 T0 -11 -12 -13 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization Fig. 4.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 13 Example of a connection diagram for the 0030 extension board 0430 E K3 K4 K5 K6 Extension board 0430 With ripple control receiver No control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization T1 -1 T1 -2 T1 T1 T1 -3 -4 -5 T1 T1 T1 -6 -7 -8 Fig.14 Example of a connection diagram for the 0430 extension board Landis+Gyr 4. 4.3.11 Example of a connection diagram for the 0600 extension board 0250 K3 K4 Extension board 0250 With supplementary power supply No control inputs 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization T1 T1 -1 -2 T1 T1 -3 -4 T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 Fig. 4. 4.User Manual Function . 4.3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3-10 H 71 0200 0036 f en .0600 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 Extension board 0600 No control inputs 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4 T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10 Signal allocation for free parametrization Fig.12 Example of a connection diagram for the 0250 extension board 0030 E Extension board 0030 With ripple control receiver No control inputs No output contacts T1 -1 Signal allocation for free parametrization Fig.3.3. 3. c2 c3 The interface boards c1 (RS232) and c2 (RS484) are permanently labelled on the plug.3.15 Connection diagram of a communication unit (example CU-A1) c1.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.16 Connection diagram of interface board c3 4.4 Further inputs and outputs Further meter inputs and outputs are the optical interface (see 6 "Communication interfaces") and the optical test outputs (see 5 "Control elements and displays" and 8 "Maintenance and service)".CU-xx DC DC DC + DC RS232 Communication unit CU-A1 CS + - - 2 pulse inputs (S0 interface) RS232 and CS interface for remote meter reading + - + TD GND RD GND T2 T2 T2 T2 -1 -2 -3 -4 S01 S02 2 3 4 T2-5 5 2 3 4 5 T2-6 Fig. 4. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3. No terminal designation must be parametrized. CS + - Interface board c3 CS interface for remote meter reading T2 T2 -3 -4 Fig. H 71 0200 0036 f en .3-11 . Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3-12 H 71 0200 0036 f en .User Manual Function . 4 Calendar clock H 71 0200 0243 .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.en . 03.en .Revision history Index − Date 31.4-2 H 71 0200 0243 .com Landis+Gyr 4.2003 Comments First edition Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.User Manual Revision history .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4 4.4.4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .5 4.3 4.4-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.10 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-6 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.4.4 4.4.4-5 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal______________ 4.1 4.en .4.8 4.6 4.4.2 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-5 Time base________________________________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.Table of contents 4.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4.4-10 H 71 0200 0243 .4.7 4.9 4.4-6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.4-3 .4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Landis+Gyr 4.en .4-4 H 71 0200 0243 .User Manual Table of contents . 5 "Time switch").4.4 Calendar clock This sub-chapter explains the functions of the calendar clock.1 Block schematic diagram for calendar clock The calendar clock has the following functions: • Formation of date and time (can be synchronized by external SYNC control signal) from internal quartz oscillator (can be synchronized with mains frequency) • Formation of integrating period (1 to 60 minutes) – likewise from internal quartz (can be synchronized with time-of-day) • Resetting – if controlled internally • Provision of date and time for various events 4... 4. H 71 0200 0243 ... Fig. control of time switch. The tariff sections T24 and T44 are also fitted with a time switch. 59) The calendar clock takes account of leap years until 2100. 31) (1 .1 Survey The meters ZMD300xxx / ZxD400xx are always fitted with a calendar clock (Time of Use). 7. where 1=Monday.. etc. 4.2 Summer/winter time The start and finish of a summer season can be defined with freely parametrized times.. etc.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . which uses the calendar clock as a time-base and performs the tariff control with the associated switching tables (see chapter 4.. Calendar clock Mains frequency 50/60 Hz Synchronizing input SYNC Quartz Integrating period synchronous integrating period Internal integrating period Internal reset Date and time for Pmax...4. resets.en . 12) (01 .) (00 . 59) (00 . 2=Tuesday. 9999) (01 .4.4-5 .3 Time elements The time function provides the following time elements (range in parentheses): • Year • Month • Calendar days • Weekdays • Hours • Minutes • Seconds (0000 .... The time shift can be ±120 minutes.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4..4.. 4. 23) (00 .4. If this is greater than 5 %.g. This is of particular importance if the meter is to record load profiles.4 Time base The internal quartz oscillator.6 Changing the date and time The date and time of the calendar clock can be changed as follows: • manually in setting mode. The quartz frequency can be tuned to the mains frequency of 50 or 60 Hz if necessary.5 Power reserve With an interruption in the voltage. There are two possibilities of synchronizing the calendar clock using the external synchronization pulses: • Several times per day • Once per day Selected application of method of synchronizing Note Only one type of synchronization can be used at a time. after 20 ms at 50 Hz or after 16.e. which sends synchronization pulses at regular intervals.4. i.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4.4. H 71 0200 0243 . called up via the service menu • via the communication interfaces • via the integrated ripple control receiver • via the control inputs 4.4. The power reserve is at least 15 days without battery and around 10 years with battery. Tuning is performed after every full wave of the mains frequency. Supercaps (capacitors of very high capacitance) ensure that the calendar clock continues for a few days. 4.4.4-6 . The meter monitors the fluctuation of the mains frequency from the quartz frequency. provided this is sufficiently accurate. either several times per day or once per day.en .4. The power supply company can use a battery in the meter as a supply during longer interruptions.67 ms at 60 Hz.1. When the power reserve expires • the date is set to 1.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal The calendar clock can be synchronized by an external master clock (e. Its temperature stability of < 0. it automatically switches off the tuning of the quartz frequency to the mains frequency.2000 • an error message is given Depending on the parametrizing the expired power reserve is indicated by a flashing arrow on the display. serves as time-base.1 s per K is also very high. the central station). which with < 0.5 second deviation per day (< 5 ppm) is of very high accuracy. When. 00:15h.4.g. the meter allows one time window per day within which the synchronization pulse must be sent to the meter.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations").ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .en .2 Synchronization interval Since the synchronization signal is transmitted at regular intervals (e.4. The time of the day (e. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the deviation (see 4. In the first case.g. With the daily synchronization.3 Synchronization time window If the "time of the day" parameter is set to 22:00h and the meter receives a synchronization signal within the defined window. synchronizing takes place at the start of the next or end of the last integrating period. the meter receives the third synchronization signal of the day (00:30h) the calendar clock is synchronized to 00:30h.4.4. Ignoring synchronization pulses Note A second synchronization pulse within the same integrating period will be ignored. Synchronization interval e. The synchronization interval is defined by parameter setting. 15 min >2s < 100 ms bounce-free Fig. 4. It is therefore recommended to set the synchronization interval identical to the capture period. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the detected deviation (see 4. 4. H 71 0200 0243 .4-7 .g.Several times per day Two synchronizing intervals are available: the integrating period or full minutes. one minute) of the window can be defined by parameter setting. the meter is synchronized to 22:00h. 00:00h. in the second case on the full minute. The meter will accept the synchronization pulse any time but only once within one capture period. 00:30h etc) it carries a time information.g.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Daily synchronization time window Once per day 00:00 Uhr 24:00 Uhr Daily synchronization pulse Fig. for instance. The meter will not accept a synchronization pulse outside the time window and the signal will therefore have no effect. 22:00h) and the width (e.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations"). 4.. Setting time and new start of integrating period Note If the time is synchronized a second time within the same integrating period. the time is advanced or set back by the corresponding number of seconds. The integrating period is shortened or elongated by the number of seconds of the time shift. The remaining deviation (fraction of a second) is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second. Landis+Gyr 4.4.User Manual Function .8 Synchronizing via communication interface The calendar clock can be synchronized by the central station. if made in one single approach. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The time can be set as often as required but only once per integrating period. Advancing or setting back the clock is only allowed once per capture period.9 s Time deviation Fig. 4.4 Meter behaviour with time deviations Smaller than 1 second Between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is smaller than one second.4.. The time information received from the central station is compared with the local time of the meter. The deviation is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second.9 Meter behaviour with time deviations Depending on the time deviation of the internal clock from the external master clock.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations"). which sends the time information to the meter via the selected communication interface. would have reset the integrating period. no correction is made to the time.4.4-8 H 71 0200 0243 . The reaction of the meter to the time information depends on the deviation (see 4. This is to prevent multiple synchronization with a small time shift resulting in a large time shift that.en . the integrating period is reset no matter how small the deviation. the synchronization has different effects on the calendar clock. The following cases are possible: • the time deviation is smaller than 1 second • the time deviation is between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds (depending on parameter setting) • the time deviation is greater than 2 to 9 seconds (depending on parameter setting) no effect time shift integrating period reset 0s 1s 2.4. If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is between one second and a maximum of nine seconds. to the start time of the integrating period.. the synchronization interval and the integrating period has been set to 15 minutes.4. The remaining second of the capture period is used to communicate and save all relevant data. The aborted (shortened) capture period is declared as invalid and a new capture period will be initiated at 30 minutes past the hour.e.: to Landis+Gyr 4.: 07 :3 1 .Greater than 2 to 9 seconds If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is greater than 2 to 9 seconds.:14:59 . 15 minutes past the hour.: :3 52 . to the end of the capture period. 4.. The aborted integrating period is declared as invalid and a new integrating period will immediately be initiated i.... the clock is set back to 15 minutes past the hour i.:59:59 . 07 :3 0 to .:45:00 .:00:00 fro m 1 :3 52 0 . for instance.e. Load profile entries for reduced integrating periods are identified by a corresponding status entry and declared invalid.4-9 ..5 to Meter behaviour dependent on time of arrival of synchronizing pulse If the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 23 minutes past the hour. H 71 0200 0243 .:30:00 ..: 22 1 :3 fro m Fig. A time setting always causes interruption of the present integrating period and the start of a new period.:29:59 Example fro .: 37 .en .:44:59 .....: fro m . In the example below..: :3 37 1 :3 0 m to .: 22 0 :3 .User Manual Function .. When setting to a time within the integrating period (possible with synchronizing signal to the full minute or with synchronization via the communication unit) two reduced integrating periods are produced.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .e. If...:15:00 .. the clock is advanced to 29 minutes and 59 seconds past the hour i. the time for the calendar clock is set to the time transmitted by the master clock. the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 22 minutes past the hour. A reduced integrating period therefore results when setting the time on the integrating period grid. 2. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.4-10 H 71 0200 0243 .4. current time-of-day (1) 0: general data 9: time data current date (2) 11 May 2000 Landis+Gyr 4.3 "Identification number system").4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function .en .10 Display and readout The following calendar clock values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: • current time-of-day • current date • day of week • status of calendar clock (only readable with DLMS) Values available Display examples Some examples are given below of calendar clock displays. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.5 Time switch H 71 0200 0029 c en Revision history Index − − a b c Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 4 to 7 New designation of time switch signals. Displays updated. New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 4.5-2 H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history Table of contents 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.5-3 Landis+Gyr 4.5-4 H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents 4.5 Time switch This sub-chapter explains the functions of the time switch. 4.5.1 Survey The time switch permits autonomous tariff control of the meter. It uses the calendar clock (see chapter 4.4) as time base and with the current day table at the desired time controls • the tariff changeover (energy and demand tariffs) • a maximum of 8 output relays • suppression or release of event signals The time switch is only fitted in meters with tariff section T24 or T44. Day tables With every change of date, i.e. at midnight, the time switch determines with the aid of various tables which day table is valid for the next day (see 4.5.2). The power supply company can define up to 8 different day tables and therefore determine the required tariff structure for the relevant type of day. Each day table contains the following information: • Number of table (1 to 8) • Max. 10 time inputs (time-of-day in hours and minutes) with status data ("1" for active, "0" for inactive) for the 16 time switch signals. The signal statuses entered apply in each case from midnight to midnight between the specified times-of-day. Day table No. X TOU-E1 TOU-E4 TOU-P1 TOU-E3 TOU-E5 TOU-E2 TOU-E6 TOU-P2 TOU-P3 TOU-P4 TOU-P5 Time switch signals TOU-K1 TOU-K2 TOU-K3 TOU-Sp TOU-P6 valid from: 00:00 to: Fig. 4.5.1 Day table The 16 time switch have specific designations. Their assignment to the functions is basically free, but the following assignments are recommended: • TOU-E1 to TOU-E6 for energy registers ERx, with parallel control also for demand registers • TOU-P1 to TOU-P6 for demand registers MDRx, if independent of the energy registers and with demand inhibition B • TOU-K1 to TOU-K3 for passing on control signals to external devices via output contacts • TOU-Sp(ecial) for a control signal independent of the remaining control signals also for passing on to external devices H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.5-5 The control signals generated corresponding to the day table effective can either be linked to control signals CS1 to CS16 via the AND and OR matrix or used directly as control signals (see 4.7 "Tariff control"). They can also be fed out via relays to external devices. 4.5.2 Determination of the valid day table The day table effective on a specific date is defined in the time switch with the aid of two further control tables: • The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for a maximum of 12 time periods. • The exception days table defines day tables deviating from the normal sequence, e.g. bank holidays, vacation, etc. The exception day table can contain up to 100 entries. Calendar clock Time/date no exception day Exception days table Day table valid at valid from to up to 8 day tables Season table Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Day table No. 1 Time switch signals TOU-E1 TOU-E2 TOU-E3 etc. to TOU-Sp valid from to up to 100 entries up to 12 entries up to 10 entries Exception day Tariff control / control table Fig. 4.5.2 Sequence to determine day table effective Following every change of date, the date is compared with the entries in the exception days table. If the date is included in the table, it is an exception day and the day table specified is used for the control. Otherwise the season table is checked in order to determine the valid day table. Season table The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for up to 12 date periods. The power supply company can therefore take account of seasonal variations for the tariff control. The season table contains no year figure and is therefore run through repetitively. In the very simplest case the season table contains a single entry with starting date 1.1. and end date 31.12., which is therefore valid for the whole year. Every entry in the season table defines the day table effective in each case from Monday to Sunday for the corresponding time period. In the simplest case the season table contains the same day table number for every weekday and which is therefore valid for the whole week. Landis+Gyr 4.5-6 H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function the changeover date on the new switching table and the date on which the currently active switching table was activated can be displayed and read out. The previous switching program is then irrevocably overwritten and is no longer available.. Every switching table can be given an identification number to identify it clearly.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. together with the number of the day table then effective. such as Easter. The table can therefore cover a long period of time. Exception days table All day dates are recorded in the exception days table on which a different control program should be used from normal operation. which is applicable to all meters simultaneously from this date. however. the Swiss national holiday on 1 August.5. The time switch operates with the previous switching table until the specified changeover date.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . e.g. The entry is then valid for an indefinite time. Calendar clock Time/date Exception days table Day table Date Changeover date no exception day Season table valid from . The new switching table becomes effective with change of date to the specified changeover date. If the exception day has a different date every year. a separate entry is necessary for every year. If the exception day has the same date every year. 4. to Day Month Year Season table new valid from .The power supply company can also specify different day tables for the individual weekdays (differing day tables for weekdays and the weekend are often encountered). H 71 0200 0029 c en . 4.3 Changeover to a new switching program The power supply company can parametrize a second switching program in the meter (passive switching table) with identification number and changeover date.3 Before changeover to a new switching program This permits the power supply company to fit all meters installed with a new switching program before this changeover date. only the day and month have to be entered in the exception days table. on which the season and day tables of the previous switching program can be overwritten with the data of new tables (the exception days table remains effective unchanged).... In addition.5. The year must also be entered in addition to the day and month. The identification number can be displayed and read out.5-7 . to Mo to Su Day table Mo to Su Day table Day table 1 to 8 new Time switch signals TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time Exception day Day table 1 to 8 Time switch signals TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time Tariff control / control table Fig. At a later date the power supply company can again set a table structure with the corresponding changeover date.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4.5-8 H 71 0200 0029 c en . to Mo to Su Day table Exception day Day table1 to 8 new Time switch signals TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time Tariff control / control table Fig.. from which the time switch is to use these tables instead of the previous versions.User Manual Function .4 Following changeover to a new switching program The changeover date and the table contents stored temporarily until the changeover are deleted after the changeover.Calendar clock Time/date no exception day Exception days table Day table Date Season table new valid from . Landis+Gyr 4..5. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.6 Ripple control receiver H 71 0200 0030 b en . 3.03.User Manual Revision history .2003 Comments First edition New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 C.09.6-2 H 71 0200 0030 b en .2 for status display Landis+Gyr Ltd.landisgyr.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Revision history Index − a b Date 09.3.2002 31. Feldstrasse 1 CH .2003 17.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.com Landis+Gyr 4.07.1 instead of C. 2 4.6-3 .6 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.7 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6 4.6.6-12 H 71 0200 0030 b en .6.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver_____________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.6.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.5 4.6.1 4.9 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .6.6-5 Field of application_________________________________________ 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.8 4.6.Table of contents 4.6.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6-11 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4. 6-4 H 71 0200 0030 b en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 4. User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. The ripple control receivers on the consumer side filter these audio frequency signals from the mains voltage and evaluate the pulse telegrams to control tariffs or to switch loads on or off.6. in particular H1 2320 1570 en.4. These ripple control signals are superimposed on the mains voltage with an amplitude of a few percent of the relevant rated mains voltage. since the ripple control receiver integrated on the extension board can be used with practically all ripple control systems by parametrizing. The power supply company feeds audio frequency signals from 110 to 2000 Hz from transmitters to the power supply network to one central or several decentralized network stations. viz.6. 4. which differ with respect to mark and space lengths as well as number of data pulses. Pulse telegrams The various manufacturers of ripple control systems have specified different types of pulse telegrams. H 71 0200 0030 b en .2 Functional principle of ripple control systems Ripple control systems are used for tariff and load control in electrical power supply networks.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . No ripple control receiver is supported for meters in three-phase three-wire networks (F-circuit).1 Field of application The ripple control receiver can be used with the ZMD300xx and ZMD400xx meters with an 0030 or 0430 extension board. The ripple control signals required for this purpose are transmitted via the power supply network. which largely corresponds with the standalone version RCR161. The audio frequency is switched on and off to transmit according to a specific pulse pattern to produce a "pulse telegram".6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver This sub-chapter includes all relevant details concerning the ripple control receiver on the extension board. 4.: • Semagyr (Landis+Gyr) • Ricontic (ABB) • Decabit (Zellweger) Details of the individual types of pulse telegrams are of no interest here. Electronic ripple control receivers for tariff and load control are standardized according to EN 61037. reference is made to the relevant documents. For further information about the RCR161 ripple control receiver.6-5 . • A non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to save the parameter data of the ripple control receiver.7 "Tariff control"). • A test key. Two types of extension boards are fitted with this: • 0030: extension board with ripple control receiver.6. The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains • A pre-filter to remove the fundamental frequency (50 Hz) and trigger the power up and power down function.1 Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver Landis+Gyr 4.6-6 H 71 0200 0030 b en . weekday.4.3 Functional description of ripple control receiver The ripple control receiver (RCR) is integrated on an optional extension board in the meter.6.User Manual Function . • A microprocessor with digital audio frequency filter. Ripple control receiver RCR RPT01 Parametrization software Optical Interface Test key Phase voltage 230 V or 58 V Pre-filter Pulse telegram RCR microprocessor RCR1 to RCR6 Communication bus EEPROM memory Network clock generation Network clock 7-day clock Fig. which evaluates the pulse telegrams received and forms the internal signals RCR1 to RCR6 for tariff control. The control signals CS1 to CS16 are produced in the control table from these signals (see 4. without control inputs.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . holidays. but without date) with switching functions. 4. without output contacts and without load profile • 0430: extension board with ripple control receiver. More detailed information can be found in the corresponding functional description H1 2320 1570 en. • A circuit to generate the network clock signal from the mains frequency. with 4 output contacts The functions of the ripple control receiver on the extension board correspond to those of the Landis & Gyr RCR161 stand-alone ripple control receiver. • A 7-day clock (with time-of-day. without control inputs. The ripple control receiver can be designed for a mains voltage of 58 V or 230 V. It can be synchronized at any time with the time-of-day or current weekday with a pulse telegram. At the same time it transmits the synchronization to the calendar clock of the meter. provided the receiver does not receive telegrams to the contrary.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 7-day clock H 71 0200 0030 b en . so that the ripple control receivers farthest from the feed point can also still reliably receive the pulse telegrams. of which the centre frequency.4. The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains a digital audio frequency filter with long-term stability integrated in the microprocessor. in particular when the voltage is restored after a failure. Connection is made externally via a terminal.Input signal The audio frequency signal superimposed on the mains voltage is fed single-phase to the ripple control receiver.5 % of mains rated voltage • Bandwidth = 0. Narrow bandwidths are selected if the rated control frequency lies in the vicinity of harmonics of the mains frequency. level and bandwidth can be parametrized corresponding to the ripple control system used by the power supply company. The earth connection is made internally from the meter.6-7 . The behaviour of the ripple control receiver in the event of a mains failure is described in chapter 4. The feed levels required are also dependent on the power supply network.6 to 6 % of rated control frequency The choice of rated control frequency (audio frequency) is highly dependent on the power distribution network. Audio frequency filter Network clock The network clock signal is derived from the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz). It is required both in the microprocessor for decoding the pulse telegrams received and also for operating the 7-day clock. Conversely the meter passes on a time shift (synchronize or set) to the 7-day clock. For this purpose it has fixed parametrized time lines or so-called memo lines. It performs the commands stored in the time or memo lines. with which it detects the telegrams arriving. The longer rise or decay times of narrow band filters require longer mark and space times of the pulse telegrams.3 to 2. The greater the extent.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . for networks of less extent higher frequencies. so that the transmission takes a little longer in systems of this kind. Typical filter values lie in the following ranges: • Centre frequency (rated control frequency) = 110 to 2000 Hz • Level (rated function voltage) = 0. the higher the selected level.6. The 7-day clock (weekly clock) running synchronously with the mains permits autonomous operation without ripple control transmissions. For extensive networks with several voltage levels lower frequencies (below 250 Hz) are generally recommended. etc. can be parametrized. Each of the 6 output signals RCR1 to RCR6 of the ripple control receiver basically represents the status of a "virtual" relay.6-8 H 71 0200 0030 b en . All variables necessary such as code length. These interpreter programs can for example delay a signal or trigger a recording as memo line. loop. time-of-day).ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . the corresponding output contact (solid state relay) is operated from the meter.RCR microprocessor The RCR microprocessor decodes the pulse telegrams filtered out of the mains voltage with the audio frequency filter and from these forms the signals RCR1 to RCR6 for the tariff control in the meter (see section 4. The RCR microprocessor can decode all customary pulse telegrams (Semagyr. Decabit. wiper. for a conventional stand-alone ripple control receiver a relay could be operated directly in this way. e. pulseinterval cycles) • Learning functions (memorizing switching times and performance with loss of transmitter) • Transmit repeat inhibit • Programmed behaviour with mains failure and restoration • Exact reset pulses. Access to the EEPROM via the RPT01 parametrizing tool is subject to strict security requirements according to EN 61010. Output signals Interpreter Landis+Gyr 4. status signals of the ripple control receiver or meter. etc.g. The ripple control signals RCR1 to RCR6 are basically each derived from a double command. If a load is to be switched in this way.User Manual Function .5). With the integral ripple control receiver on the extension board these signals are fed to the control matrix in the meter for the tariff and load control. Double Decabit. Memory The parameters and important instantaneous values for a mains failure are stored in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) of the ripple control receiver. The RCR microprocessor can exchange messages with the meter via a communication bus (e.g. i. pulse duration. K22/Z22.e. 14'51"/9" • Automatic correction of pulse distortions • Transmitter failure detection • Setting time-of-day of meter or ripple control receiver • Recording of specific events in non-volatile memory The free programming capability enables the scope of functions to be continuously supplemented as required without exchanging hardware. Ricontic. Further functions of the RCR microprocessor: • Time functions (fixed or random switch on/off delay. The receiver can execute the signals directly or first allow an interpreter program to run.). switch on the extension board – is situated between the terminal blocks of the extension board....c...................... EN 61037 • Safety conditions ............ Test key T Fig........2 Arrangement of test key (example extension board 0430) For access to the test key the terminal cover secured with factory seals must be removed.... while use of these 6 RCR signals is determined by the parametrizing of the meter with the MAP190 parametrization tool (matrix definition).... The effect can be checked from the resulting statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6 (display or readout).... The 6 RCR signals RCR1 to RCR6 are defined with the parametrizing of the ripple control receiver. Dangerous voltage Danger The test key should only be operated with a plastic tool suitable for this purpose.......... EN 50081-2 H 71 0200 0030 b en ................ Contact with parts under voltage is dangerous to life........................................... 4..User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4......Pollution ........ 4...Parametrizing Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver is performed with the RPT01 parametrization tool...................ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 ........ via a separate optical interface on the extension board. software for 32-bit Windows operating systems specially developed for parametrizing Landis+Gyr ripple control receivers... which actuates a p. 4...6........ With a metal tool there is otherwise a danger of touching live conductors at the terminals......................4 Test key of ripple control receiver A parametrized switching program is triggered by pressing the test key.6...........5 Technical data of ripple control receiver Standards • Ripple control receiver ............. EN 50081-1 ......6-9 ....b.... The parametrizing data are stored in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the extension board.. EN 61010 • EMC ..........6......... The test key – a plastic slider..................Emission .. ..8.1.......ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . etc.....2.0013 F: 12 fs (Hz): 183...0 2.3 Tariff face plate (example ZxD400CT) 1 2 Output contact data Data of ripple control receiver RCR Landis+Gyr 4... 0....8..... 58 V or 230 V • Frequency ..6.0 2.... Double Decabit...0 8.8..4......0 T = Energy tariff S01: 1 imp = 1 Wh S02: 1 imp = 1 Wh +Ri 5.2..........6 to 6 % of fs External influences • Same as meter (see meter user manual) 4..0 S02 72 832 138 +A -A 1...1 Time-of-day 0.8....4.3 Uf (%): 0......2.0 1....... 110 to 2000 Hz • Bandwidth ...0 6.....8...5. 0.5........0 8..4.. period Pmax Energy Total energy K1: 1 imp = 1 Wh (+A) K2: 1 imp = 100 varh (+R) Ownership designation K3: Boiler K4: Electrial heating K5: K6: ID-No: 0128...0 7....0 7.. Display check F.T 2.0 5.. 4........0 S01 3:1.0 Pmax cumulated Last tm/P running P last integr.0 +Rc 6......0 1...6.......0 Battery hours counter 2:1.0 5.8.50 1 2 x V A Fig.........5......4....2 Date C...0 8....... pulse length and pulse position can be parametrized Electrical values • Input mains voltage single-phase .6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate 8..6.....0 5..........0 7.....9........0 6.0 6..0 7...9.6-10 H 71 0200 0030 b en ...5% of rated mains voltage • Rated control frequency fs ....5....6...0 6......T 2..........T 7.0 2.......0 Reset counter 0......2.....5.2...T 5.8.... Ricontic...T 8..0 1..0 -Ri 7...) • Code length..6....0 8... Decabit..6......0 1..4..F Functional error 0.0 5........8.8..5..4......... typ...T 6.Ripple control systems • All customary pulse codes (Semagyr..0 2..8...8...6.2.8..0 -Rc 8..6.0 1..8........ 50 or 60 Hz • Supply ...... provided by basic meter Filter values (parametrized) • Rated function voltage Uf ..User Manual Function ......0 Identification 0. K22/Z22.....8...3 to 2.6......8... 4 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and 4 output contacts H 71 0200 0030 b en .6. including saving data to the EEPROM and the power-down program if parametrized. which causes the latter to perform its own disconnection program. while the other two phase voltages or at least one remains. It sends the ripple control receiver a failure warning. If the phase fails to which the ripple control receiver is connected.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 4. In this case the ripple control receiver does not receive a failure warning from the meter. the meter performs a controlled disconnection (blocking of inputs and outputs. switching of tariff unit to standby operation and backup of data).8 Connection diagrams K3 E K4 K5 K6 Extension board 0430 with ripple control receiver no control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization 30 Lx 61 61 62 63 64 65 66 Fig. there is a short wait until the audio frequency filter has responded and then run through the switch-on program (restoration of the data saved and setting of signals RCR1 to RCR6 corresponding to the parametrizing).4.6.7 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure If all phases are concerned during a power failure. but it can no longer detect any ripple control signal. but detects the failure as soon as the mains frequency fails for more than 500 ms. Voltage interruption Voltage restoration When the phase voltage(s) affected by the mains failure are restored. the ripple control receiver can in fact still generate the network clock. 4.6-11 . the ripple control receiver performs its own disconnection program and reports this to the meter. the ripple control receiver detects this by the return of the mains frequency and report by the meter. Following initializing of the ripple control receiver. If the neutral line fails.6. It will detect this status as transmitter failure.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 6-12 H 71 0200 0030 b en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3 "Identification number system"). their statuses can also be seen from the tariff arrow symbols. Values available Display examples Some examples are given below of ripple control receiver displays.9 Display and readout The following ripple control receiver values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: • Statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6 • Identification number of ripple control receiver The operating status of the ripple control receiver can also be indicated with an arrow symbol in the display: • Arrow absent = ripple control receiver not ready • Arrow displayed = ripple control receiver receiving pulse telegram • Arrow flashing = ripple control receiver ready If signals RCR1 to RCR6 are used for tariff control.User Manual Function .2. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.6.4. a) Signal "0" (Pos. Status of signals RCR1 to RCR6 C: service data Figure means Line means Signal "1" (Pos. b) 3: signal statuses Identification number ripple control program Landis+Gyr 4. 7 Tariff control H 71 0200 0026 f en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 2 supplemented with voltage failure event Landis+Gyr Ltd.05.1999 17.2002 31.07.03.2000 28.06.02. 4.2003 30.Revision history Index − a b c d e f Date 26.09.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 4 to 10 Control signals and synchronizing updated selectable synchronisation window of 2 to 9 s New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Fig.landisgyr. Feldstrasse 1 CH .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.com Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Revision history .04.7.2000 29.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .7-2 H 71 0200 0026 f en .2002 01. 3 4.7.2 4.7-7 Aktivierung der Steuersignale ________________________________ 4.7-3 .7.7-8 H 71 0200 0026 f en .7.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.4 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.Table of contents 4.7.7-5 Control table _____________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions ________________________________________ 4.1 4.7 4. Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Table of contents .7-4 H 71 0200 0026 f en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . as well as the status signals such as "Reset inhibit active".7.5) • via a ripple control receiver (see 4.7 Tariff control This sub-chapter provides a survey of the various kinds of tariff control and the formation of control signals. OR matrix for 16 control signals CS1-16 Energy / demand registers Demand monitoring Operating times Output relays / arrows Reset inhibit Setting mode Test mode Time switch active etc.6) • via event signals or status messages The methods of tariff control listed permit the requirements of the power supply company to be suitably defined by parametrization any combinations (assuming the meter is designed for this purpose). Fig. as well as about the registers and functions controlled in this way. All signals are available for transmission via output relays and activation of the arrows in the display. Control table Signal sources control inputs statuses event signals time switch ripple control receiver AND matrix for 24 logic signals LSx etc. etc.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . etc.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 4.4.7. The meter can also use the time switch signals directly instead of the control signals. "Meter in setting mode". These control the energy and demand registers in addition to other functions.1 Survey tariff control ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters permit tariff control: • via control inputs • via the time switch (see 4. 4.7-5 .1 Survey tariff control Signals from the various signal sources can be combined to form logic signals in the AND matrix and in the following OR matrix to control signals. etc. H 71 0200 0026 f en . Example: TI1 Terminal T0-7 TI2 Terminal T0-8 2. TI10 Time/date invalid Demand monitoring Under/overvoltage Voltage failure Overcurrent Power factor fallen below TOU1 ..7-6 H 71 0200 0026 f en .4. so that they form combinations from the existing signals from the signal sources. TOU16 RCR1 . Example: external control with inputs TI1 and TI2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 0 produces LS1 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 0 produces LS2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 1 produces LS3 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 1 produces LS4 LS1 produces CS3 LS2 produces CS2 LS3 or LS4 produces CS1. RCR6 etc. The AND matrix links the signals of the relevant signal sources to logic signals LSx. Control inputs Statuses TI1 . LS24 Control signals CS1 . etc.7. CS3 for tariff 3 energy and demand inhibition.User Manual Function ...2 Formation of control signals The following steps are necessary to determine the tariff control: 1. Landis+Gyr 4.2 Control table Up to 16 control signals (CS1 to CS16) can be defined with the AND and OR matrices. 4.g.. Event signals Matrix for assigning logic signals LS to the sources Time switch Ripple control receiver 24 logic signals with AND combination LS1 . inputs to the control terminals).. CS16 OR matrix Fig. based on the relevant tariff structure. 4.. Example: 3 energy and 2 demand tariffs.. e. Example: CS1 and CS2 for tariff 1 and tariff 2 energy and demand. 3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .g. Every control function requires one of the control signals CSx or the time switch signals TOUx directly.7.. Finally the power supply company assigns the signals to the signal sources with respect to hardware or software (e. the following OR matrix combines them to the control signals CSx. changeover of energy and demand tariffs with the associated tariff arrows in the display. The power supply company first determines the required control functions.. One control signal can serve several functions.. User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.. MDR24 OTR1 . The energy proportions of the selected measured value are accordingly recorded or not recorded in the register. ER24 MDR1 .7. 4.. Arrow 12 Fig. OTR8 PFR1 + PFR2 Demand monitoring Power factor monitoring K1 .4 Controllable registers and functions H 71 0200 0026 f en .3 Registers/functions Time switch signals TOU1 to TOU16 Control signals CS1 to CS16 Energy registers Demand registers Operating time registers Power factor registers Signal sources Event signals Output relays Arrows LCD ER1 .7-7 .Each control signal can have one of the 3 following statuses: • 1 (active) • 0 (inactive) • blank (no function) A control signal for example switches on a specific tariff register (energy or demand register) when active and off when inactive...7..7. K8 Arrow 1 .. All control signals not required remain in the "blank" condition and therefore have no function. Register or function Control signal = "0" (inactive) Tariff or function inactive Register or function Control signal = "1" (active) Tariff or function active Control signal not required Control signal = "blank" (no function) Fig..ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3 Control signal statuses 4.. 4... User Manual Function . are therefore synchronous with the integrating period and do not generate a new start of the integrating period. signal controls. All tariff changeovers.7-8 H 71 0200 0026 f en . 4. • Every output signal can be synchronized individually with the integrating period. etc.10 "Power factors") • Event signals of monitoring functions • Output contacts • Tariff arrows in liquid crystal display The output relays and the arrows in the display can also be assigned to all other signal sources.4 Activation of control signals The signals at the output of the control table (CS1 to CS16) can be synchronized with the integrating period by parametrizing.9 "Demand recording") • Operating time registers per tariff • Power factor registers (see 4. • All output signals change their status immediately when a corresponding input signal changes.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .7. The following possibilities are available: • All output signals only change their status at the end of the present integrating period. The output signals therefore respond in different ways to changes in the input signals. etc. setting mode. test mode.8 "Energy recording") • Demand registers (see 4. such as event signals and additional statuses like reset inhibit. Landis+Gyr 4.The following tariff registers and functions can be controlled according to the parametrization with control signals CS1 to CS16 or time switch signals TOU1 to TOU16: • Energy registers (see 4. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.8 Energy recording H 71 0200 0024 h en . 04.09.2003 30.2000 28.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . types of recording.1999 17.com Landis+Gyr 4.2000 12. residual value processing).06.07. Various corrections Energy registers rounding-off supplement Number of AT/CT registers.03.2001 18.2002 31. registers for secondary data.2001 22.8-2 H 71 0200 0024 h en . number of stored values Updating (terminology revision.landisgyr. ZxD410AT replaces ZxD210AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Section 4.2002 01.06.User Manual Revision history .6: Reference added for memory determination for stored values f Landis+Gyr Ltd.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision.03.8.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.05.04.Revision history Index − a b c d e f g h Date 26. Feldstrasse 1 CH . 5 4.8-3 .8.7 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.8-7 Types of energy recording___________________________________ 4.3 4.8-10 Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.8.Table of contents 4.1 4.8-10 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.8.8 4.8-8 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.4 4.2 4.8-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.8.8.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8.6 4.8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8.8-6 Formation of energy proportions______________________________ 4.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8.8-12 H 71 0200 0024 h en . User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8-4 H 71 0200 0024 h en . 8-5 .4. 8 meas.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Energy registers The power supply company has 24 energy registers and 8 total energy registers available for energy recording by the ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters. etc.10 "Power factors"). Display Fig.1 Block schematic diagram of energy recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx H 71 0200 0024 h en .1 Energy recording This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording energy. Survey From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4.8. Tariff switching 24 demand registers Selection of data for display and readout Readout etc. Versions ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit: • Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers. 4.8 4.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization). These measured values can be recorded as follows: • In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs • In the total energy registers as energy status and • In the demand registers at demand tariffs (see 4.9 "Demand recording") In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cosϕ can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4. total energy and demand registers.8.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. • Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy. but no demand registers. values etc. 8 P running 8 energy total registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8.VA Fig. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted.User Manual Function +VA .4. 8 meas.8.8-6 H 71 0200 0024 h en .4 +A -A Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax Landis+Gyr 4.quantities/quadrants cos ϕ +R -R Fig.quantities/quadrants +/-VA1 +/-VA2 +/-VA3 cos ϕ cos ϕ 1 cos ϕ 2 cos ϕ 3 +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 +/-R1 +/-R2 +/-R3 +VA . 4. ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing. 8 measured values +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 Fig.8.3 Measured values of ZFD400Cx ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power. Each measured value is assigned • a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA). From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type.8. 4.values from meas. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors. 4.values from meas. • the sum of the three phases (ΣL) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and • one or more quadrants The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx.VA +R -R +A -A .2 +A -A Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx ZFD400Cx The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor. 8 meas. +A -A Measured values of ZFD400Ax Height dependent on power Fixed clock frequency 1s Fig.6 Energy proportions for energy and total energy registers Adaptation to kWh takes place in the energy register.100 Wh X Value register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh total 12 digits Fig. 0. For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. 8 measured values Fig.001 to over 20.7 of which 4 decimal places Processing of energy proportions H 71 0200 0024 h en . Energy proportion value I Example: 0.8. whereby the resolution of the memory is sufficient to permit recording of the very small amounts of energy during starting.X . This amount X is fed to the energy or total energy register.8.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.8.000 Wh I . These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e. the rest remains in the value register.8-7 . 4.8.g. several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit (1/10 Wh) is reached and the energy register is increased by 1. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . mW).ZFD400Ax The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available.3 Formation of energy proportions The measured values scanned every second are fed via the selection matrix to the memory for the present value of the energy register provided. Processing of energy proportions With low power in comparison with the rated power. 4.5 4. ..g. kWh or MWh) and the value represented by the last digit of the energy register (0..000 k...008 Wh Energy register 0000. none 00. 000.h 0000000 k.0635 kWh Register resolution Adaptation of the energy proportions is based on general principles..h 00000.1 .0278 kWh 0000. x1 00..1 ...... 0000 k..h M.h 0000000 k.046 Wh 0.0124 kWh 0000.0 M..018 Wh 0..ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 ..4 Types of energy recording The energy registers of the meter can record the energy proportions arriving in the following ways: • as cumulated status (with or without stored values) • as advance during the billing period (always stored values) • as advance during the recording period of the load profile (only for recording in the load profile) Energy recording Landis+Gyr 4.372 Wh 13. / k.0 M.h 0000000 k.000 k.. none 0.567 Wh 21..h 00000.8-8 H 71 0200 0024 h en ..00 k..h 0000000 M.Example: Time 0s 1s 2s 3s Energy proportion value I 12. kWh) are then decisive..446 Wh 15...000 k. none x 10 none x 100 k....h 0000000 k...085 Wh 0. the energy register units (e..h = kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh 4. The highest power applied to the meter. 000..0413 kWh 0000.10 etc..........0 k.00 M.. The resolution matched to the maximum demand is shown with those for the demand registers in the following table: Energy P highest 50 … 500 W 500 W … 5 kW 5 … 50 kW 50 … 500 kW 500 … 5000 kW 5 … 50 MW 50 … 500 MW Reading 0000.h 000000....h 000000.8. 0000 k..123 Wh Value register 0.User Manual Function .0 k.h Decade reading constant none none none none none x 10 none x 100 none x 1000 Demand Reading Decade reading constant 0.00 M.00 k. none none 0. none 0000 k...000 M. / M... which apply both to mechanical counters as well as electronic tariff units. Storage at end of billing period 0042500 5300 0037200 4300 0032900 6600 0026300 Fig. 4. It then records the energy consumption during the next billing period and saves this again as stored value. 1 each per measured value Total energy register 1 Cumulated status max. The total energy registers always record the cumulated status. The reason that processing of the status is still preferred by the power supply company is because of the same processing for electronic and mechanical meters (the latter cannot record any advance).8 registers. 24 energy registers Energy register X Advance Load profile Recording period Energy register 1 Status or consumption Tariff switching Latest stored value Resetting Latest stored value max. 4. even if the energy registers operate with energy consumption. The consumption during a billing period is obtained from the difference between new and old status.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8. 8 measured values Fig.9 Energy recording as cumulated status Advance during the billing period For energy recording as advance during the billing period the meter sets the contents of the energy register concerned to zero at the end of the billing period and saves the previously determined consumption as stored value.8-9 H 71 0200 0024 h en .8 Energy recording Cumulated status With energy recording as status the memory runningly adds the present value of energy. Landis+Gyr 4. The power supply company can use the consumptions determined in this way directly for billing. Calculation of the energy consumption is made after every reading in the EDP of the power supply company.8.User Manual Function . 8. The number of possible stored values can be parametrized (refer to section 4. The associated energy proportions are runningly summated in the total energy registers. The maximum of 8 measured quantities have up to 24 energy registers available for the ZxD410Ax/310Cx/400Cx. Landis+Gyr 4. to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values.3 "Memory management".6 Resetting Formation of stored values At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present value as latest stored value. 4.Reset at end of billing period 0042500 Energy recording as cumulated status 0037200 4300 0032900 6600 5300 6600 Energy recording as advance 5300 4300 0026300 Fig. 4. however. The sum of energy advances therefore always corresponds to the cumulated status of the total energy registers.8-10 H 71 0200 0024 h en . section "Memory determination for stored values"). 4. It can also only be displayed and read out via the load profile. and the recording period of the load profile as control signal for start and end of energy recording. Residual value processing If the meter records energy as advance. The remainder not displayed is retained in the memory and is included in the next billing or integrating period. the oldest stored value is overwritten.8.10 Energy recording as advance during the billing period Advance during the recording period Energy recording as advance during the recording period basically operates in the same way as energy recording as advance during the billing period.User Manual Function . Every time a new stored value is stored.13.8. One of the 24 energy registers is required for every measured value to be recorded as energy advance in the load profile.5 Tariff control The tariff switching determines which energy registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. it only stores the value according to the section as stored value or in the load profile. but not to the stored values registers. The register content is fed immediately and exclusively to the load profile. The meter uses a separate register.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . This is then not available for the tariff control. The desired resolution can be parametrized. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5. Some examples are given below of energy register displays.8.7 Display and readout The resolution of the total energy and energy tariff registers can be parametrized and has 7 or 8 digits with up to 4 decimal places. The resolution of the advances can similarly be parametrized. This determines the visible range.8. but no more than 8 digits are available. Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Stored value 02 (February) Active energy import (1) Total status (8.0) Reactive energy import (3) Status (8) Tariff 2 H 71 0200 0024 h en .11 Display window 8 digits with 1 decimal place A so-called test mode is provided for test purposes.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The registers are displayed 5-digit with up to 4 decimal places. which uses a higher resolution of the registers and therefore reduces the testing time accordingly. Register size Display Since a maximum of 8 digits can be shown in the value field of the liquid crystal display (see 5.3 "Identification number system").2.8-11 . Readout Display examples The values are shown the same in the readout as in the display. 4. Test mode off Display (examples) 7 digits without decimal place 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh Test mode on 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh Fig.2). a window is placed over the register for the display. Either kWh / kvarh / kVAh or MWh / Mvarh / MVAh can be used as unit.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.4. 8 Energy registers for primary and secondary data Meters for transformer connection (ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx) can be parametrized for primary or secondary data. by which the meter directly supplies the data assigned to the transformers connected. The first 16 energy registers are assigned for primary data and the 8 registers ER17 to ER24 for secondary data.User Manual Function . Landis+Gyr 4. For this purpose it is possible with the meters ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx to parametrize the energy registers in principle with respect to the primary or secondary data.Reactive energy in first quadrant (5) Status (8) Tariff 2 Active energy export (2) Status (8) Tariff 1 Apparent energy import (9) Status (8) Tariff 1 Active energy import in phase L1 (21) Status (8) Tariff 2 Active energy import in phase L2 (41) Status (8) Tariff 2 4. The transformer data can be parametrized individually. The individual parametrization of the meters to primary data is frequently not protected by the calibration seals.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8. Some countries therefore demand that in parallel with the primary data the meters must also record at least the energy with reference to the secondary data. The display and readout data need no longer then be multiplied by a transformation factor.8-12 H 71 0200 0024 h en . 9 Demand recording H 71 0200 0025 e en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 2000 28.9-2 H 71 0200 0025 e en . Feldstrasse 1 CH .Revision history Index − − a b c d e Date 11.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.02.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Various corrections Number of AT/CT registers.2001 18.01.2000 22.03.landisgyr. ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.04.04.05.09.2000 17.2002 01. rolling maximum.2002 31. residual value processing).ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . number of stored values Updating (terminology revision.com Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Revision history . 9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9.9.3 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.8 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.4 4.9-19 H 71 0200 0025 e en .9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9.9.9 4.9-3 .6 4.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.9-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.11 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9.7 4.Table of contents 4.9.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .9.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9.9-19 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.1 4.9.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.10 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period__________________ 4.9 4.9.5 4.2 4.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Landis+Gyr 4.9-4 H 71 0200 0025 e en .User Manual Table of contents . • Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy.9-5 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 4.4. 4. Demand registers For demand recording by the meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx the power supply company has available 8 registers for running mean values of demand and 24 demand registers.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization).9. 24 demand registers Selection of data for display and log Readout 8 P running 8 total energy registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .8 "Energy recording") • In the total energy registers as energy status (see also 4. Display Fig. Tariff switching etc.9. 8 measured values etc. These measured values can be recorded as follows: • In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs (see 4. total energy and demand registers. etc.1 Block schematic diagram of demand recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx H 71 0200 0025 e en .8 "Energy recording") and • In the demand registers at demand tariffs In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cosϕ can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4. Versions ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit: • Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers. but no demand registers.9 Demand recording This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording demand.10 "Power factors").1 Survey From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4. 4.9.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .quantities/quadrants +/-VA1 +/-VA2 +/-VA3 cos ϕ cos ϕ 1 cos ϕ 2 cos ϕ 3 +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 +/-R1 +/-R2 +/-R3 +VA .9. • the sum of the three phases (ΣL) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and • one or more quadrants The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx.2 Available measured quantities for measured value formation Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type.quantities/quadrants cos ϕ +R -R Fig.values from meas.4 +A -A Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax Landis+Gyr 4. 8 meas.9.4.values from meas.User Manual Function +VA . 8 measured values +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 Fig. Each measured value is assigned • a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA).2 +A -A Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx ZFD400Cx The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors.3 Measured values of ZFD400Cx ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power. 4.9-6 H 71 0200 0025 e en . ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing.VA Fig. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted.9.VA +R -R +A -A . 8 meas. 4. From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values. 7 Processing of energy proportions With low power in comparison with the rated power.1 kW Value register proportion Example: value I Multiplication 0.6 Energy proportions Processing of energy proportions The energy proportions are adapted to the integrating period selected. 4. 4 for 15 min 0 0 0 0 kW Fig.X .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .ZFD400Ax The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available. • Multiplication factor 12 for a pulse interval of 5 minutes.004 to over 80 W X (can only be 1 integrating period in this example) e. • Multiplication factor 4 for a pulse interval of 15 minutes. 4.5 4. These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e. 8 measured values Fig. For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. i.9-7 .e.g. several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit is reached and the register is increased by 1.3 Formation of demand values The measured values scanned every second are fed to the assigned mean values of demand register.9. multiplied by a factor inversely proportional to the integrating period. mW). H 71 0200 0025 e en . Proportion value I P Energy M MP I P .9. Examples: • Multiplication factor 1 for a pulse interval of 60 minutes.g. This figure X is fed to the register. 0. Energy proportions +A -A Measured values of ZFD400Ax Height dependent on power Fixed clock frequency 1s Fig. the remainder remains in the value register. 4.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.9.9. 0 k... The resolution of the register..0 M.00 M.046 kW 0..003 kW Demand register 000. 0000 k.h 0000000 k..9-8 H 71 0200 0025 e en ...00 k.00 M.Example: Time 0s 1s 2s 3s Energy proportion value I 0.. however.h Decade reading constant none none none none none x 10 none x 100 none x 1000 Demand Reading Decade reading constant 0.046 kW 0.h 000000..h 0000000 M...0 M.h 0000000 k..000 M.h 0000000 k....0 kW 000.... none x 10 none x 100 k.053 kW 0.000 k. should also not be too small..000 k.095 kW 0.048 kW 0. 000. 0000 k.h = kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh Landis+Gyr 4..ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 ......00 k.h 00000..h 0000000 k. The capacity of the register must be sufficiently large to ensure there is no overflow. none 0000 k.0 kW 000....1 kW 000. The resolution of the demand registers matched to the maximum meter power is shown together with that of the energy registers in the following table (demand registers with 4 digits): Energy P highest 50 … 500 W 500 W … 5 kW 5 … 50 kW 50 … 500 kW 500 … 5000 kW 5 … 50 MW 50 … 500 MW Reading 0000...... x1 00.. / M..0 k....049 kW 0..h 000000.055 kW Value register 0.. / k.h M... none 0.000 k.. none 00. 000.User Manual Function .2 kW Register resolution The resolution of the demand registers (significance of last visible digit) is basically dependent on the maximum power of the meter..h 00000. none none 0.... Several demand registers can access the same mean value of demand (different tariffs). 351 kW. The rolling mean value of demand is subject to smaller jumps with fluctuating energy consumption than the individual mean value. As shown in the following example. At the end of the integrating period the running mean values of demand are available for further processing in the demand registers.4. The formation of the rolling mean value of demand begins with the first subinterval following a reset or tariff switching. 4. the better the smoothing. Each of these registers summates the measured values assigned during one integrating period. For this purpose the individual mean values of demand formed during an interval period are accepted at the end of every interval period in a ring memory. H 71 0200 0025 e en .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. the mean value of demand can fluctuate considerably from one integrating period to the next. The more intervals considered for an integrating period. a complete integrating period (5 intervals here) is required before the rolling mean value is formed. Rolling mean value The power supply company can.).8 tm tm = integrating period Running mean value of demand If the energy consumption varies. P P running Simple mean value t tm Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . which is renewed at every interval. A new valid mean value of demand is then available at the end of every interval period (335 kW.9.4 Formation of mean value of demand The existing 8 registers for mean values of demand of the running integrating period are permanently assigned to the 8 selected measured values.9. 329 kW.9-9 . The rolling mean value of demand is then formed from the relevant latest ring memory contents (up to 15 intervals can be considered). then also combine several intervals to a total integrating period to form a rolling mean value. etc. however. 9-10 H 71 0200 0025 e en .kW 256 P interval 309 271 478 360 225 423 330 171 363 kW P rolling 167 113 51 263 335 329 351 363 302 336 364 Gleitender Mittelwert über 5 Intervallperioden complete intgrating period over 5 interval periods Fig.9. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . in the example shown therefore as follows (all values in kW): Interval 1: (0+0+0+0+0)/5 = 0 Interval 2: (256+0+0+0+0)/5 = 51 Interval 3: (309+256+0+0+0)/5 = 113 Interval 4: (271+309+256+0+0)/5 = 167 Interval 5: (478+271+309+256+0)/5 = 263 Interval 6: (360+478+271+309+256)/5 = 335 (1st valid value) Interval 7: (225+360+478+271+309)/5 = 329 (2nd valid value) Interval 8: (423+225+360+478+271)/5 = 351 (3rd valid value) etc. Landis+Gyr 4.9 Formation of rolling mean value of demand The rolling mean value is provided as average value of the ring buffer contents.User Manual Function . 5 Mean demand value for last integrating period At the beginning of every integrating period the running mean demand values are reset each time to zero. Residual value processing At the end of the integrating or subinterval period only the visible part of the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand for the last integrating period in the load profile.The sum of the integrating periods therefore corresponds in this case to the cumulated status of the total energy registers. The residual value remaining in the value register is taken into account in the next integrating period. Load profile With simple demand measurement the mean values of demand for the last integrating period can be taken over by the load profile memory.Possible intervals The following conditions apply to the determination of the interval and integrating period: • Minimum interval and integrating period duration: • Maximum interval and integrating period duration: • Maximum number of intervals per integrating period: 1 min 60 min 15 This provides the following possibilities for interval determination: Number of intervals Integrating period in minutes 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 Duration of interval period in minutes 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 60 – 1 – 5 – 10 15 30 – – 1 – – 5 – 10 20 – – – – – – 5 – 15 – – – 1 2 3 4 6 12 – – – – – – – 5 10 – – – – 1 – 2 3 6 – – – – – – – – 5 – – – – – 1 – 2 4 4.9-11 . H 71 0200 0025 e en . the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand at the end of every subinterval period.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . In the case of rolling mean value. They are first stored as mean demand values for the last integrating period (freeze function) and are therefore available for display and readout during the next integrating period.9.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. The value is stored in the load profile at the end of every integrating period. the mean value can be stored for the subinterval.User Manual Function . two cases are possible: • If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the subinterval period. • If the present mean demand value is less than the highest mean value of demand. In this case energy values (statuses or advances) must be used.In the case of rolling mean value. no demand values can be stored in the load profile. P P max Demand P running t Fig.9-12 H 71 0200 0025 e en . unless the values are stored in a load profile. but normally only records the highest value. the maximum demand remains unchanged.9.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .9. • If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the integrating period. 4. Landis+Gyr 4.9. the meter stores the present mean demand value as new maximum demand and simultaneously records the time (date and time-of-day) at which the new maximum occurred. It is not possible to store the mean value over several subinterval periods or the integrating period.10 Determination of maximum demand Provided the corresponding active tariff and demand measurement are not limited by the power supply company (refer to 4. 4.6 Maximum demand The highest mean value of demand determined during the entire billing period is highly important for tariff control. • If the present mean demand value is greater than the highest mean value of demand.9 "Demand inhibition"). The meter therefore determines a large number of mean demand values during the entire billing period. the meter therefore compares the present mean value of demand at the end of each integrating period with the previous highest mean value of demand for the present billing period. All other values are lost. 11 Demand registers Tariff control The tariff switching determines which demand registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. 8 measured values Fig. Any of the 8 existing mean values of demand can also be assigned to each demand register as input quantity. Several stored values of succeeding integrating periods remain stored. Various demand values for the tariff control can be recorded in the 24 demand registers available.9-13 . At the same time the maximum demand value is added to the previous sum of all maximum demand values and stored as cumulated maximum demand in the corresponding register. Several demand registers can also access the same mean value of demand to form various tariffs.Resetting At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present maximum demand value together with date and time as latest stored value. The maximum 8 present mean values of demand have up to 24 demand registers available to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values. Demand registers Each demand register comprises a memory each for the present maximum demand and for the cumulated maximum demand as well as up to 15 memories for stored values. P running last integrating period Demand register 1 P max cumul.9. H 71 0200 0025 e en . Every time a new stored value is stored.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 4. The maximum demand is then reset to zero and determination of a new maximum for the new billing period starts. Latest stored value Reset 2 : P max 1 Date/time Display Readout Calendar clock 1: P running = P rolling from N P interval N = 1 to 15 1>2? yes Tariff switching P interval x max. the oldest stored value is overwritten. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .g. integrating period of 15 minutes starting at 10:00.4. but not synchronized with this • externally via a control input internal. External Control The external control of the integrating period is made via the same input mB as the demand inhibition (see chapter 4.9.12 Externally controlled integrating period If the external signal comes before the internal. 11:00. external control signal via terminal mB t internal control signal from quartz oscillator t New start intregrating period New start intregrating period t Time shift normally negligible Fig. Since all units of the ZxD300 and ZxD400 series have a calendar clock. The integrating period can then be synchronized with the time-of-day. The integrating period is started again every time the unit is started.9-14 H 71 0200 0025 e en .). 10:15.9). 10:30.4). but not synchronized with the time-of-day. 11:15 etc. the demand comparison takes place immediately with a new start of the integrating period. synchronous Control of the integrating period takes place internally by the quartz oscillator of the calendar clock (see section 4. The internal control does in fact run parallel. This form of control is normally used. asynchronous Control of the integrating period is likewise internal. since otherwise the profiles cannot be further processed by a data evaluation centre. but the external has higher priority and determines the time grid of the integrating period.User Manual Function . internal. It is used above all for very simple units without calendar clock and without load profile. 4. 10:45.9.9. so that it always starts on the full hour (e. When using load profiles this setting is even essential. this application is somewhat unusual. Landis+Gyr 4.7 Controlling the integrating period Control of the integrating period can take place in three different ways: • internally via the calendar clock and synchronized with this • internally via the calendar clock. however. This normally produces a small time shift. by the following external signal which re-starts itself. it likewise initiates the demand comparison and re-starts the integrating period.9-15 .9 "Demand inhibition"). the control input mB must always have voltage applied (signal status "1"). This permits the power supply company to use both internal and external control without having to use a second version for this purpose. 4. however. This re-start is interrupted.9.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. the internal signal automatically takes over control of the integrating period while the external signal is absent. With internal control. If the external control signal fails for any reason. since otherwise there is no demand measurement (see 4. however. The power supply company. must ensure sufficient accuracy of the external control.9.13 External control of integrating period H 71 0200 0025 e en . but this is negligible if the external control is sufficiently accurate. P P running t t IP Control signal 1 0 t t pulse t IP Fig. Principle of control The integrating period is controlled by negative pulses (status "0") with a duration of at least 2 seconds and maximum 60 seconds.If the internal signal is before the external.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 8 New start of integrating period The following events result in a new start of the integrating period: • Voltage failure asynchronous integrating period IP kW P running Voltage failure Voltage return t IP t<t IP Voltage interruption New start IP t IP time-synchronized integrating period IP kW P running Voltage failure Voltage return New start IP t IP kW P running t IP Voltage failure N x t IP t IP Voltage return t IP New start IP t IP t IP t IP t<t IP t IP Fig. A shorter period then occurs for a new start.9-16 H 71 0200 0025 e en .always with a time-synchronized integrating period The shift in particular of the time-of-day would cause a too long (reset time) or too short integrating period (advance time). Landis+Gyr 4. the meter can continue demand measurement depending on the parametrizing and conclude in the correct manner (see illustration above. since the next new start is given by the time-synchronism (see illustration above. middle part). centre) or restart. The meter does. within which there is no new start.always with an asynchronous integrating period . 9 seconds.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .14 New start integrating period with voltage failure . If the voltage is restored within the integrating period.4.9. however. • Setting time/date . bottom).9. It is therefore necessary to re-start the time-synchronous integrating period (see following figure.User Manual Function .with time-synchronized integrating period always if the voltage interruption continues beyond the integrating period.no new start with an asynchronous integrating period . 4. have a time window of 1% of the integrating period or max. similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period. if the deviation is more than 1 % of the integrating period.similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period. H 71 0200 0025 e en . • Changeover demand tariff . reset • Synchronize time (with time-synchronized interval period) Synchronization of the time has the same effect as a shift.9. tariff switching. bottom) • Actuate reset . unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above.3 "Calendar clock").15 New start integrating period with time shift. but max. 4.always with an asynchronous integrating period .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .asynchronous integrating period IP kW P running Time shift Tariff switching Reset New start IP no new start IP t IP t IP t<t IP t IP time-synchronous integrating period IP kW P running Time shift New start IP Tariff switching Reset no new start IP t IP kW P running t IP t<t IP t IP Tariff switching Reset t<t IP t IP no new start IP power comparison only at the end of the IP t IP t IP t IP t IP Fig. unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above.9-17 . bottom) For an integrating period begun. the meter always performs a demand comparison. For an asynchronous integrating period it always starts in the new tariff or in the new reset period with a full integrating period.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.5.always with an asynchronous integrating period . 9 seconds (see chapter 4. User Manual Function . that only the formation of the maximum demands.g. however.9. Two interrupted periods are possibly produced. 4. always performs a demand comparison in the old tariff or in the expired reset period. limiting via an external control input is not possible directly (see also below). 4.9. the integrating period is controlled internally.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . but not that of the running mean demand. the demand measurement is ended without demand comparison until voltage is restored to input mB. can be suppressed. This is because it must be possible to suppress the formation of the maximum but recording in the load profile should be continued. e. In the event of external control the signal transmitter determines the start and end of the integrating period. If the signal voltage returns within 60 seconds (status "1") as is the case with external control of the integrating period. It should be noted. If the control signal mB is interrupted for more than 60 seconds. on low tariff or during the weekend. The meter. the meter performs a demand comparison and immediately restarts the integrating period. however. Control of this time limiting is possible externally via the control input mB or by the internal control signals. Landis+Gyr 4.No new start No new start of the integrating period is made for the following events: • Set/synchronize time (for asynchronous integrating period) • Demand tariff switching (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period) • Actuate reset (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period) With time-synchronized integrating period a tariff changeover or reset must not interrupt the integrating period.9-18 H 71 0200 0025 e en . External control The following applies if the integrating period is controlled externally via input mB: following every interruption of the signal voltage (status "0") at input mB.9 Demand inhibition The power supply company can interrupt demand measurement for certain periods. the demand measurement started continues normally.16 Externally controlled limiting of demand measurement with external control of integrating period t New start of integrating period If. Control signal mB 60 s Time limit of the power recording t Fig. however. 11 Display and readout The resolution of the demand registers can be parametrized: The mean demand values and maximum demands are either 4 or 5 digits with up to 4 decimal places. with up to 4 decimal places possible. Register size H 71 0200 0025 e en .10 Signal transfer The integrating period can be transferred to external equipment via an output contact of the meter.e. only the formation of maximum demands can be suppressed. in which the relay is connected in parallel with the contact The contact is closed during the integrating period and controls by signal interruption. 4. This can take place for example with a ripple control receiver or a time switch.9.9-19 . The interruption. the contact closes delayed by the decoupling time te (1 % of the integrating period).17 Transfer contact integrating period as opening circuit The signal for demand limiting can be transferred in the same way. This is performed by setting the control signal of the maximum demand register to status "0". Following re-start of the integrating period at the end of the time limit. 4. 9 seconds for example with a period of 15 minutes. i.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The cumulated maximum registers have 6 or 7 digits.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Opening circuit Integrating period te Fig. in which the relay is connected in series with the contact or • short-circuit connection. The transfer is made according to the following diagram either in the • opening circuit. Either kW / kvar / kVA or MW / Mvar / MVA can be used as unit.e. 4.9. It is also possible by corresponding parametrizing of the control table to provide this function by an external control input. The contact is then open or closed throughout the time limit of the demand measurement. i.Internal control As mentioned above. the decoupling time te is 1 % of the integrating period.9. 2.User Manual Function . similarly with date and time Display examples Some examples are given below of demand register displays.Values available The following demand register values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: • present status of cumulated maxima • present demand mean value with status of integrating period • demand mean value of preceding interval period • present demand maximum during the current resetting period with date and time of occurrence • demand maxima of preceding billing periods as stored values.9-20 H 71 0200 0025 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5. Cumulated demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Present demand mean value Active power import Tariff 1 Demand mean value of preceding interval period Active power import Tariff 1 Demand maximum of present billing period Active power import Tariff 1 Date of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Time-of-day of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Stored value 04 of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Landis+Gyr 4.3 "Identification number system"). Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.10 Power factors H 71 0200 0033 a en . ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Revision history .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.Revision history Index − a Date 28.landisgyr.03.2002 31.com Landis+Gyr 4. Feldstrasse 1 CH .10-2 H 71 0200 0033 a en .2003 Comments First edition New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.02. 10-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period ________________ 4.10.10-9 H 71 0200 0033 a en .4 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.10.10.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.10 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Table of contents 4.10-3 .1 4.3 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10.2 4. Landis+Gyr 4.10-4 H 71 0200 0033 a en .User Manual Table of contents .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. if the meter is configured accordingly.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . i.10-5 .10.10 Power factors This sub-section explains in detail all functions for recording power factors. 4.4.10.3 "Formation of measured quantities"): • PF total: Total power factor cosϕ (mean value of the 3 phases) • PF L1: Power factor cosϕ1 of phase L1 (only in ZMD) • PF L2: Power factor cosϕ2 of phase L2 (only in ZMD) • PF L3: Power factor cosϕ3 of phase L3 (only in ZMD) PF total = A L S L A L1 S L1 A L2 S L2 A L3 S L3 PF x Instantaneous value Fig. Instantaneous values The following instantaneous values of power factors are provided by the microprocessor as measured quantities. I rms PF L2 = PF L3 = Display PF x Readout PF x These instantaneous values of power factors are available for display and readout. H 71 0200 0033 a en . calculated every second from the relevant active and apparent powers (see also 4. No other use is provided.e.2. Mean value during integrating period The mean value of power factor during the integrating period can be formed from the running mean values of demand of active and apparent power recorded during the last integrating period (positive sum of the three phases) and from this the minimum power factor determined.1 Survey Recording of power factors cosφ is reserved for combimeters ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx. 4. The mean value can also be accepted by the data profile to permit the energy supply company also to assign the relevant power factor to the individual mean values of demand and the maximum demand. which calculate these from the relevant active and apparent powers.1 Instantaneous values of power factors PF L1 = Calculation of PF x from A (active power) and S (reactive power) every second Calculation of S: S = P 2 + Q2 or S = U rms. The meter calculates the value every second and can save it at the end of the resetting period as stored value. 8 measured values etc. Power factor registers Tariff switching cos ϕ 24 demand registers etc. The data can also be displayed.e. Landis+Gyr 4. 4.2 Block schematic diagram of mean value formation power factor cosφ Readout/Display Readout of the data recorded can be made according to IEC 62056-21 or the DLMS concept (see chapter 6 "Communication interfaces").2 Formation of mean value during integrating period Only combimeters with tariff unit T41 or T44.10. Of these the meter uses the running demand mean value of the integrating period just completed to calculate the mean power factor PF IP during the integrating period. Display Fig.User Manual Function .Mean value during resetting period From the total energy of active and apparent power recorded (positive sum of the three phases) the meter can finally also calculate a mean value during the resetting period (billing period). 4. etc.10. Selection of data for display and log Readout 8 P running 8 total energy registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max. can form this mean value during the integrating period.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.10-6 H 71 0200 0033 a en . i. with demand recording. The two measured values • active power import in the three phases +A and • apparent power import in the three phases +S must be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the integrating period. 10-7 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 1: PF last IP PF register 1 PF min cumul.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .4 Determination of minimum power factor PF min Each power factor register comprises a memory for both the present minimum power factor PF min and the cumulated minimum power factor PF min cumulated. latest stored value Reset 2 : PF min 1 Date/time Display Readout Display Readout 1. The present PF min is then set to the value 1 and the time reset to zero.3 Mean value formation during integrating period Minimum formation The evaluation.0 yes 1>2? yes Calendar clock Tariff switching PF register 2 PF min cumul. the PF last IP is stored as new PF min together with date and time.e. H 71 0200 0033 a en . A threshold for the minimum apparent power prevents the meter recording the (frequently worse) power factor at demands which are too low. If PF last IP is less than the present PF min. Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF min is cumulated in the PF min cumulated memory and recorded as stored value together with date and time. 4. 4. latest stored value Reset 2 : PF min 2 Date/time T > T min ? minimum apparent power 1>2? yes Calendar clock Tariff switching Fig. the determination of the power factor minimum PF min. i.10.P running S P running +A Measured values P last IP +A P last IP S PF register 1 P last IP S P last IP +A Measured value 8 apparent power (sum of phases) Measured value 7 active power (sum of phases) PF IP = for minimum power factor PF register 2 Tariff switching Data profile Fig.10. in addition to several memories for stored values. At the end of every integrating period a comparison is made of the present minimum power factor PF min (lowest value of power factor so far) and the mean value of power factor PF last IP determined during the integrating period. is made in one or two power factor registers similar to maximum formation in the demand registers. Otherwise PF min remains unchanged. Tariff switching The tariff switching determines in which of the two power factor registers the comparison is made. The two measured values • active power import in the three phases +A and • apparent power import in the three phases +S must also be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the resetting or billing period.e.10-8 H 71 0200 0033 a en . The PF RP register is then reset to the value 1.3 Formation of mean value during resetting period Combimeters with tariff unit T21 or T24. a new calculation of the power factor is also performed every second during the resetting period. without demand recording. Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.10. 4. Of these the meter uses the relevant value of two energy registers with energy import to calculate the mean power factor PF RP during the resetting period. ME8: Energy import +S ME7: Energy import +A Measured values Energy import +A Energy import +S Register PF RP Reset latest stored value Mean value over billing period newly calculated every second Measured value 8 apparent power (sum of phases) Measured value 7 active power (sum of phases) PF RP = Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF RP is saved as stored value together with date and time. 4. can also form the mean value during the resetting period (billing period).10. i. Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Function .5 Mean value formation during resetting period Since the values of the energy registers are updated every second. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3 "Identification number system").10-9 . cosϕ (13) Mean value of last integrating period (5) cosϕ (13) Minimum of current billing period (3) Date of minimum Time-of-day of minimum cosϕ (13) Minimum – stored value of April (04) cosϕ (13) Mean value of current resetting period (0) H 71 0200 0033 a en .4.4 Display and readout The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization • instantaneous values • present status of cumulated minimum PF min cumulated • the mean value at the end of the integrating period PF last IP • the present power factor minimum PF min during the present billing period with time of day and date of occurrence • the power factor minima PF min in the preceding billing periods as stored values likewise with time and date • the number of times exceeded per power factor threshold Values available Display examples Some examples are given below of power factor register displays.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.10. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2. 10-10 H 71 0200 0033 a en .cosϕ phase L1 (33) Instantaneous value (7) Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Function .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.11 Operating time registers H 71 0200 0244 . 03.en .landisgyr.Revision history Index − Date 31.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .11-2 H 71 0200 0244 . Feldstrasse 1 CH .com Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Revision history .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2003 Comments First edition Landis+Gyr Ltd. Table of contents 4.11 4.11-3 .en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .11-5 H 71 0200 0244 .11.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.1 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4. en .11-4 H 71 0200 0244 .User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The time is measured and added in the register as soon as the meter is connected to the supply. The total operating time can therefore be assigned to the individual tariffs.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Display and readout Display examples The operating time registers are displayed in minutes. When the battery is changed the register must be cleared via the interface or in setting mode.11-5 .4. there may be a meter malfunction present or an attempted fraud. If this is not the case. The sum of the registers with tariff should always be the same as the total operating time. Operating time per tariff A maximum of 8 operating time registers with tariff settings are available. It is immaterial whether the unit has voltage applied or not.3 "Identification number system").2. Some examples are given below of operating time register displays. The register can be cleared together with the operating times for each tariff via the interface. Battery operating time This register measures the time during which the battery is inserted in the unit. Control is performed in the same way as for the energy or demand registers. By regular measurement of the battery voltage the battery is also used during mains operation.1 Survey The following operating times can be recorded in operating time registers: • Total operating time of meter • Operating time per tariff specified • Operating time of battery Total operating time This register shows the total operating time of the meter in the network.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4. Total operating time (0) C: service data 8: operating time Operating time tariff 1 (1) C: service data 8: operating time H 71 0200 0244 .11.en . The registers can be cleared together with the total operating time via the interface. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.11 Operating time registers This sub-chapter explains the functions of the operating time registers. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .en .User Manual Function .Battery operating time (0) C: service data 6: battery Landis+Gyr 4.11-6 H 71 0200 0244 . 12 Formation of billing periods (resetting) H 71 0200 0245 a en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 06.03.2003 Comments First edition Section 4.User Manual Revision history .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2003 30.Revision history Index − a Date 31.12.3: Reference added for memory determination for stored values Landis+Gyr Ltd.12-2 H 71 0200 0245 a en .com Landis+Gyr 4.landisgyr. Feldstrasse 1 CH .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 12.3 4.12.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12.12-3 .12-6 H 71 0200 0245 a en .2 4.12 4.12.4 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.1 4.Table of contents 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .12-4 H 71 0200 0245 a en .Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Table of contents . H 71 0200 0245 a en .e.on a specific day every week (1 = Monday .exactly at the end of the month (reset is always made at midnight.12 Formation of billing periods (resetting) This sub-chapter explains resetting of the registers at the end of billing periods. which can be particularly useful during a test. Depending on the parametrizing the active reset block is indicated by a flashing arrow. 4. e.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .on one or two specific days within a month always at midnight . regardless how initiated. i. The other sources are not blocked. The duration can be selected between 0 minutes (no block) and several hours. i. 4.in any month or every 2nd. The reset block (inhibit) only acts on the source which has actuated the reset. maximum demand and minimum power factor registers and can take place in the following ways: • Manually with the reset button (This is situated under the front door and is secured with a company seal. on the first day of the following month at 00:00. .coupled to the summer/winter changeover • Internally by the ripple control receiver of the extension board • By a formatted command via the serial interface (With a handheld terminal.4.12. .1 Survey Resetting at the end of a billing period applies to the energy. during which a further reset is not possible.) The reset always affects the entire meter.g. total energy. for example. the so-called reset block. etc.12-5 .) • Externally via the corresponding control terminals with the functions KA and KB • Internally by the calendar clock. all registers. 4th month. since 24:00 does not exist) . starts a time window.2 Reset block Every reset.12.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 3rd. A voltage interruption can remove the block.7 = Sunday) at midnight in each case . the reader can actuate the reset locally and then read out the data without opening a seal.e. e. Example: 1. within which it uses the number of the previous month. the time shows the date and time-ofday of the following day.3 "Memory management". This also applies if the reset signal arrives after midnight. The meter has a time window of 6 hours. date and time) • Stored values of registers stored in stored value profile (date.8.3 "Identification number system").User Manual Function .12.07 = status active energy tariff 1 end of July.4 Display and readout The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: • Reset counter • Time of last reset • Stored values reset counter (number. etc.g. If the reset takes place at midnight.3 Identification of stored values With a reset the correspondingly parametrized register values are stored in the stored value profile (refer to section 4. With monthly numbering the stored values for January are therefore always given the number 01.12-6 H 71 0200 0245 a en .g. They can then be distinguished on one hand by the sequence and on the other hand by the time of resetting. Reset counter Measured quantity 0 Type of measurement 1. for a change of customer) two stored values have the same number. Nevertheless the stored value still receives the number of the foregoing period. The identification numbers for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5. If a second reset takes place within one month (e.2. From this number the reader can immediately allocate the stored value to the relevant month.0 Date of reset Stored value 03 1st april 2002 Landis+Gyr 4.4. of the previous month.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . This can either be the status of the reset meter or.1. section "Memory determination for stored values"). This form of numbering refers to the calendar clock.12. particularly with monthly resetting. time and register value) Values available Display examples Some examples are given below of reset displays. The index of the stored values is given a specific supplement. the number of the relevant month. those for February the number 02.13. 4. Time-of-day of reset Stored value 03 00:00 midnight Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Stored value 03 Storage date Stored value 03 1st april 2002 Storage time Stored value 03 00:00 midnight H 71 0200 0245 a en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .12-7 .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .12-8 H 71 0200 0245 a en .User Manual Function .Landis+Gyr 4. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.13 Profiles H 71 0200 0032 e en . 04. data profile replaced by load profile.2000 02.2003 30. status supplemented New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 New memory management with software version B21. Feldstrasse 1 CH .03.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www. status entry.13-2 H 71 0200 0032 e en .06.12.2000 18.2001 18.com Landis+Gyr 4. new events Landis+Gyr Ltd. memory depth and display updated.09.landisgyr. event signals.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Revision history Index − a b c d e Date 29.2002 31.2003 Comments First edition Status entry adapted in data profile "Reset" event type supplemented Measured values.04.User Manual Revision history . 1 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.13 4.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.Table of contents 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-3 .3 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.2 4.13.13.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .13-13 H 71 0200 0032 e en .13. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .13-4 H 71 0200 0032 e en .Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Table of contents . 13.4.1 Event log The event log is an aperiodic memory. The time of occurrence (time and date) and the relevant event number are therefore always recorded for specific events. error reports or statuses of the total energy registers.3 "Memory management").3 "Types of display"). The memory available for the event profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by the parametrization (see section 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function . The event log entries can be displayed and read out via the interfaces.13-5 H 71 0200 0032 e en . Event types The following table shows which event types can be recorded under which event number in the event log: Event type Tariff registers cleared Load profile memory cleared Battery charge low Battery voltage ok Meter reset performed Summer/winter changeover Time/date newly set (old values) Time/date newly set (new values) Control inputs status changed Undervoltage phase L1 Undervoltage phase L2 Undervoltage phase L3 Overvoltage phase L1 Overvoltage phase L2 Overvoltage phase L3 Voltage failure Voltage return Overcurrent phase L1 Overcurrent phase L2 Overcurrent phase L3 Overcurrent neutral Number 2 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Landis+Gyr 4. For display the event log can be selected with its own menu item in the display menu (see chapter 5.13 Profiles This sub-chapter explains the functions of the event log (aperiodic memory) and of the load profile (periodic memory) and division of the available memory. 4. For every event the meter can store additional data such as event signals. The memory required for each entry in the event log varies accordingly.13. User Manual Function . press the Reset button briefly under the front door. e.Event type Power factors fallen below (4) Power factors exceeded (8) Error during self-test (4) Voltage failure phase 1 Voltage failure phase 2 Voltage failure phase 3 Error "Battery voltage low" Error "Time/date invalid" Error "Access measuring system memory" Error "Time base" Error "Ripple control receiver" Error "Communication unit" Error "Display and control panel“ Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" Error "Measuring system failed" Error "Re-programming failed" Error "Setting mode failed" Error "System failed" Error "Communication blocked" Error "Wrong flash memory identification" Error "Wrong function extensions identification" Failure of an SMS message transmission to GSM modem Important operating message recorded Number 29 to 32 33 to 40 45 to 48 49 50 51 65 66 75 76 78 79 80 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 105 106 Display The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the event log is to be contained in the display or service menu. 2. The following procedure should be adopted to display entries in the event log: 1. The first item of the menu concerned appears.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The display check appears.13-6 H 71 0200 0032 e en . press the "up" or "down" display button again briefly. If the event is contained in the service menu. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. If the event is contained in the display menu. Landis+Gyr 4.g. "Display list" (standard data). The number of the first event is displayed. (Voltage failure) 7. The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the latest event appears first followed by the others in decreasing date sequence or whether the oldest appears first with the others in increasing date sequence. The time-of-day of the first event is displayed. Press the "down" display button briefly.) H 71 0200 0032 e en . Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the date of the first event appears. Display the remaining entries in the event log in chronological order by holding down the "down" display button.98). Press the "down" display button briefly. The end of the event log is denoted by "End".13-7 . (30 June 2002) 5.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Event log" menu item appears (denoted with P. (Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function and causes a return to the operating display.3. 8.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 6. 4. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until return is made to the display menu. For this purpose the start and end of the part must be entered with a readout instruction.2 Load profile In contrast to the event log.9 "Demand recording"). The maximum 16 channels of the load profile comprise time entry.13. The power supply company can read the complete profile or only a part. 4. If it only records the energy tariff register values. time shifts and manual resets.13. the status of the energy totals.Readout The event log data can be read out with DLMS or according to the VDEW specification (R5/R6 commands). 4.1 Structure of load profile The memory available for the load profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by parametrization (see section 4. Date / Time Status up to 14 measured values Fig.3 "Memory management"). Structure Every entry in the load profile comprises a time. status entry and the maximum 14 possible measured values. which continuously records the quantities specified following every recording period (this normally corresponds to the integrating period). The status entry comprises the following bits (bit 0 = LSB): Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Landis+Gyr 4.13. The following events lead to additional entries in the load profile: voltage failure and voltage restoration. the recording period can be set individually. the load profile is a periodic memory.13-8 Status entry Fatal error occurred Power reserve of calendar clock exhausted (time invalid) Incomplete measurement owing to integrating period too short H 71 0200 0032 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Function . the recording period corresponds to the integrating period (or to the interval period with rolling demand measurement) of the demand registers (see also chapter 4. various important status information items and the individual measured values. Measured values The following measured values can be recorded in the load profile: • Demand mean values (P last integrating period) • Power factor mean values (PF last integrating period) • Energy tariff registers (status or advance) • Total energy registers • Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period • Phase currents as mean value in integrating period • Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period Recording period If the load profile records the mean demand values. the voltages and/or currents. e.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .g. H 71 0200 0032 e en .13-9 . 0 = winter) or dynamic. i. "Display list" (standard data). Display Entries in the load profile can be displayed on the meter as follows: 1. 2.start of interval) Integrating period ended by tariff changeover (EOI . by time setting) Integrating period ended normally by external control Integrating period ended normally by internal control Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 to Bit 31 reserved for future extensions It can be selected by parametrizing whether bits 0 to 15 or bits 0 to 31 are to be displayed. Resetting performed Time/date set Voltages returned (power up) Voltages (3 phases) failed (power down) not used not used not used not used not used Event log completely deleted Load profile memory completely deleted Status word recorded before setting last time reserved reserved reserved Integrating period started (SOI . The display check appears. only active during the first recording period following the change from summer to winter time and vice-versa. Press the "up" or "down" display button again briefly.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly.g. The first item of the display menu appears.Bit 3 Summer or winter time Depending on the parametrization this bit is static (1 = summer.e.end of interval) Integrating period ended prematurely (e. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the time of the first recording or integrating period of the day appears. All measured values and the status entry are shown in a rolling display (changing every 2 seconds). Press "up" or "down" display button briefly until the time of the desired recording or integrating period appears.User Manual Function . (29 August 2002) 6. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the date of the desired day appears (the end of the load profile is denoted with "End".ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Load profile" menu item appears (denoted with P. see also point 9). Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the date of the last entry appears.01).13-10 H 71 0200 0032 e en . Status entry display (8 = summer) Landis+Gyr 4. (30 August 2002) 5. 7. 4. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . P last IP of +Ri 8. P last IP of +A e. The time of the next or preceding recording or integrating period is displayed with their measured values in a rolling display.e.13-11 .g. 9. The end of the day is denoted with "End".User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function at any time and causes a return to the operating display. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until a jump is made to the next highest level (day selection list or display menu). H 71 0200 0032 e en .g. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. 12 or 14. the second figure is not used. Bits 8 to 15 Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 * * * * Value in hexadecimal code * not used * Event log completely deleted Load profile memory completely deleted Status word recorded before setting last time The first figure can have the value 2. Deletion of the data in the load profile is only possible in accordance with the specific national provisions. With re-parametrization of the load profile structure (e. 4. 0=winter) Reset performed Time/date reset Voltage restored (power up) Total voltage failure (power down) Both figures can have a value between 0 (no bit set) and F (all 4 bits set).ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 6.g. 8. Readout The data of the load profile can be read out with DLMS or IEC 62056-21 according to the VDEW specification. more or less channels) the entire load profile is deleted automatically.Status entry display: Bits 0 to 7 Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Fatal error present Time/date invalid (power reserve exhausted) Incomplete measurement.13-12 H 71 0200 0032 e en .User Manual Function . Deleting load profile Landis+Gyr 4. IP too short Summer/winter (8=summer. The power supply company can read the entire profile or part of it. 10. 13-13 .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 20 kByte 0 to max. which can be freely assigned by the power supply company within specific limits for the data to be stored.3 Memory management Meters of the ZxD series with software version B21 or higher have a defined memory area.13. however.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. 4. The remaining memory can only be freely divided in complete memory blocks (so-called "memory pages"). Constant memory area for billing data Maximum memory area for stored values and profiles (480 kBytes) Variable memory area for stored values Variable memory area for event log Variable memory area for load profile Fig. H 71 0200 0032 e en . demand and other registers. Free division of memory only possible when ordering Note The division of the memory must be made at the time of ordering. which ensures that there is always sufficient memory available for all energy.5 kByte 0 to max. 1870 Memory determination for stored values In ZxD meters the stored values for energy. 480 kByte Number of memory pages 0 to max. 78 0 to max. The power supply company is therefore able to assign more or less memory in the meter configuration for stored values. In the display and readout according to IEC. they are shown allocated to the relevant register.2 Division of memory area available 480 kbytes are available. A single memory page comprises 263 bytes. It cannot be altered retroactively. These can be allocated as follows: Use Stored values Event log Load profile Memory size 0 to max. 21. event log or load profile according to requirements.4. power and power factor registers are stored in one profile.13. The memory area is defined for the billing values and cannot be changed. 84 0 to max. i.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .e. i. maximum 255 events Both functions can be freely specified by the power supply company.g.e. Memory required = 15 • ((16 • 6) + (18 • 9) + 1 + 5 + 4) bytes = 4020 bytes or 16 memory blocks Memory determination for event log Specific information or registers defined by the meter parametrizing are stored in the event log for every event. can comprise a maximum of 21. e. The memory required. status information. however. 16 demand registers and 2 power factor registers with 15 stored values each per register. total energy registers • Memory depth: number of events to be stored in the event log. maximum 24 energy and 24 demand or power factor registers • Memory depth: number of stored values to be stored by each register. can amount to maximum 20 kbytes.13-14 H 71 0200 0032 e en . i. however. The memory required for the event log depends on the profile width and memory depth: • Profile width: type and number of registers stored for every event. The memory required. likewise determined by the meter parametrizing. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values: Value Time of event (always stored) EDIS status (always stored) Event number (should always be stored) Error register Total energy registers 1 to 10 Memory required 5 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 6 bytes per register Landis+Gyr 4.5 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values: Value Reset actuation (always stored) Reset time (always stored) Reset counter (always stored) Energy tariff registers (status or advance) Demand registers (demand maximum with time stamp) Power factor registers (minimum with time stamp) Memory required 1 byte 5 bytes 4 bytes 6 bytes per register 9 bytes per register 9 bytes per register Example: Recording of 16 energy registers.User Manual Function .The memory required for the stored values depends on the profile width and memory depth: • Profile width: number of registers for which stored values are formed.e. maximum 53 stored values (corresponding to one year with weekly resetting) Both functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. the load profile must be activated in the meter configuration. The memory required for the load profile depends on the profile width.13-15 . event number and error register. EDIS status. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values: Value Time of load profile entry (always stored) EDIS status (always stored) Demand mean values of last integrating period Power factor mean values of last integrating period Energy tariff registers (status or advance) Total energy registers Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period Phase currents as mean value in integrating period Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period Memory required 5 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes The memory depth of the load profile is calculated by the following formula: Memory available in bytes (bytes per entry) • (integrating periods per day + 1) Example 1: Recording of 4 mean demand values with a recording period of 15 minutes (96 entries per day) and 460 kbytes available memory. however.Example: Recording of 250 events with time of day.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. however. The memory required.e. Memory depth = 460'000 / ((5 + 4 + (4 • 4)) • (96 + 1)) = 189 days H 71 0200 0032 e en . maximum 14 energy. the length of the recording period and the memory depth: • Profile width: number of registers stored in the load profile. Memory required = 250 • (5 + 2 + 1 + 4) bytes = 3000 bytes or 12 memory blocks Memory determination for load profile The memory available for the load profile is determined automatically by the order program based on the total memory and the memory assigned for the stored value profile and event log.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . demand or instantaneous value registers • Length of recording period: (selectable between 1 and 60 minutes): this determines the number of entries per day • Memory depth: number of days to be recorded in the load profile All three functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. can only comprise a maximum of 480 kbytes. i. For this purpose. Example 2: Recording of 6 energy registers. Memory depth = 480'000 / ((5 + 4 + (6 • 6)+ 4 + (3 • 4)) • (288 + 1)) = 27 days Landis+Gyr 4.User Manual Function . 1 power factor register and 3 phase voltages with a recording period of 5 minutes (288 entries per day) and 480 kbytes available memory.13-16 H 71 0200 0032 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.14 Monitoring functions H 71 0200 0031 d en . 04..14-2 H 71 0200 0031 d en .User Manual Revision history ..3600 s (1.Revision history Index − a b c d Date 29.05.2003 Comments First edition Hysteresis limit value p.2002 31.2002 02.3600s) ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd. 4.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.com Landis+Gyr 4. Feldstrasse 1 CH .03.10-5 now 5.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .01.landisgyr.2000 07.2002 18.09. Table of contents 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 4.14.4 4.14.5 4.14.6 4.14.7 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals_______________________ 4.14-7 Voltage monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9 H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.14-3 Landis+Gyr 4.14-4 H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents 4.14 Monitoring functions This sub-chapter explains the functions for monitoring values and the generation and transmission of corresponding event signals. 4.14.1 Survey The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx can monitor various values and generate event signals if specific limits are exceeded or fallen below for a sufficiently long time. These event signals can be used for tariff control (see chapter 4.7), for counting in event registers, for entry in the event log (see chapter 4.13) or for transmission to external devices via an output contact. Active energy or combimeters can monitor the values in the table below: Values and type of monitoring Phase voltages (failure, over- and undervoltages) Phase currents (overcurrents) Neutral current (overcurrent) Running demand mean value or demand mean value of last integrating period (exceeded) Power factor mean value (fallen below) ZMD300Ax ZxD400Ax yes yes ZMD only yes no ZMD300Cx ZxD400Cx yes yes ZMD only yes yes Other values monitored or recorded are mains frequency, direction of rotating field and the phase angles. They only appear in the display or readout, however, and are not therefore described further here. 4.14.2 Functional principle Threshold T Number n M M>T? or M<T? no yes Hysteresis ny=nx+1 counter n nx 0 ny=nx-1 ny = n M ? no yes Set event M Interrogation of monitored value M Voltage Current P running Power factor next value no ny = 0 ? yes Delete event M Fig. 4.14.1 Principle of monitoring of value exceeded Monitoring of exceeding of a value takes place on the following principle (monitoring of falling below operates in a similar way). H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.14-5 The value M monitored (e.g. a phase voltage) is compared every second with a specific limit (threshold T). Value too high If the value M monitored is greater than the threshold T, the so-called hysteresis counter n is increased by 1 or counts upwards every second if this condition continues. When the count has reached a specific limit value x (adjustable from 5 to 3600 s) the counter generates the corresponding event signal, provided the signal from the CS matrix or timer has released the monitoring of value M. The power supply company can set the response sensitivity as required with the hysteresis limit value x (1 = immediate response the first time the value is exceeded, 3600 = response only after the value has been exceeded for one hour). Value not too high If the value M monitored is smaller than the threshold T, the hysteresis counter n remains at zero or is reduced by 1 if its count is not already zero. Any event signal set is only deleted when the count is zero. The event is therefore set with a delay and deleted according to the set hysteresis limit value x. The diagram below shows the effect of hysteresis with the example of voltage monitoring with a hysteresis limit value x of 5. Voltage 5 4 3 2 1 0 Hysteresis Hysteresis counter with limit value x = 5 Threshold T for overvoltage Voltage waveshape (mean values per second) Time Overvoltage set event Duration of overvoltage deleted Fig. 4.14.2 Effect of hysteresis In the example above the overvoltage event is set with a delay of 5 seconds after the threshold is exceeded because the hysteresis counter only reaches its limit value after 5 values of overvoltage are detected. To delete the overvoltage event the voltage must also lie below the threshold for at least 5 seconds, since the hysteresis counter only returns to zero after the threshold has been fallen below 5 times. If the voltage exceeds the threshold for less than 5 seconds, the counter does not set an event. Nor does it delete it if the voltage falls below the threshold briefly. Landis+Gyr 4.14-6 H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function 4.14.3 Application possibilities for event signals If the meter has recorded an event and this is released, the corresponding event signal can be used as follows: • Tariff control Each event signal can be set via the control matrix for tariff control, e.g. if the phase current exceeds a specific threshold, it could set the meter to a different tariff level. • Event counter An event counter counts the individual events and provides this to the display and/or the readout. • Entry in event log The counter records the time and date on which the event occurred. It can therefore record the event with the corresponding number, time and date in the event log (aperiodic memory). This provides the power supply company with an event log corresponding to its requirements. • Transmission The event signal can also be transmitted to external devices via an output contact. It can also activate one of the arrows of the display to indicate the relevant status optically. 4.14.4 Voltage monitoring The voltage monitoring comprises the following elements: • Voltage failure in each individual phase (fixed threshold 20 V) • Total voltage failure in all phases • Overvoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold) • Undervoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold) Under-/overvoltage If the individual phase voltages are greater than 35 V, the meter can check these for under- and overvoltages. For this purpose the power supply company sets a lower and an upper threshold. If a phase voltage falls below the lower threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Undervoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis. If a phase voltage exceeds the upper threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overvoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis. The meter can accept both an undervoltage and an overvoltage as described in section 4.14.3. H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.14-7 4.14.5 Current monitoring The current monitoring comprises the following individual monitored values: • Overcurrent in individual phases (parametrized threshold) • Overcurrent in neutral in the ZMD (parametrized threshold) Overcurrent The meter checks the individual phase currents and the neutral current (ZMD) with respect to overcurrent (= overload). The power supply company can set a threshold for this purpose. If a phase current or neutral current falls below its threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overcurrent" for the relevant phase or neutral after a delay determined by the hysteresis. The meter can accept an overcurrent as described in section 4.14.3. 4.14.6 Demand monitoring The meter can monitor the running mean values of demand for maximum 8 measured values with respect to exceeding of individually adjustable thresholds. For this the meter uses either the running mean value of demand or the mean value of the last integrating period of a measured value. Since it concerns a value determined over the integrating period, no hysteresis is required. For the running mean value of demand the event is deleted automatically at the end of the integrating period. The power supply company can operate the demand monitoring continuously or release or block it with the release signal. All signals present in the tariff control are available as release signal. The meter can accept an exceeding of the demand as described in section 4.14.3. Running or last mean value Running mean demand value Demand threshold t IP Monitoring of running mean value Monitoring of last mean value t IP t IP = Integrating period Fig. 4.14.3 Running or last mean value Landis+Gyr 4.14-8 H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function the meter immediately sets the event signal "Power factor fallen below" for the relevant measured value. 4. The event signal is deleted again automatically at the end of the integrating period. no hysteresis is required.e. at an unspecified time within the integrating period.7 Power factor monitoring Monitoring of the power factor is only possible in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . which is essential in conjunction with load profiles. If the mean value of power factor falls below the set threshold.14-9 . when the new mean value during the last integrating period occurs. i.3. The meter can accept a falling below of the power factor as described in section 4. it is recommended to monitor the mean value during the last integrating period.e. Since each power factor mean value is already determined over the integrating period. i. In this case the meter only sets the event at the end of the integrating period. The power supply company should therefore use monitoring of the running mean value when there is to be an immediate reaction to exceeding of the threshold. H 71 0200 0031 d en . • Mean value during last integrating period If the power supply company uses demand monitoring for tariff control. The meter can monitor the mean values of power factor with respect to falling below an individually adjustable threshold.14.14. where the power supply company wants to pass on the event signal to external devices. The tariff switching is therefore synchronized with the integrating period. This is particularly the case with load control.• Running mean value With the running mean value the event occurs exactly when the mean value exceeds the threshold. The running mean value is less suitable for direct tariff control.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. User Manual Function .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Landis+Gyr 4.14-10 H 71 0200 0031 d en . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4.15 Security system H 71 0200 0038 e en . 3 new.02.Revision history Index − a b c d e Date 26.2002 31.09.15-2 H 71 0200 0038 e en .landisgyr.03.User Manual Revision history .1999 17.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision.2003 30. additional clarifications Landis+Gyr Ltd.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .07. Feldstrasse 1 CH .com Landis+Gyr 4. Changes on pages 4 to 6 Security switch S2 instead of S1 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Sequence of sections adapted. Section 8.06.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.2000 28.04.2000 29. 4 4.15-3 .15-6 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.2 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .15 4.15.3 4.15.15.1 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.15-5 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.Table of contents 4.15-9 H 71 0200 0038 e en .5 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15. 15-4 H 71 0200 0038 e en .Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents . 15-5 .. only the lower 5 levels are available (level 0 – level 4).1 Example for the access to the various security levels It should be noted when using the dims protocol that access is possible at all levels. Utility seal Reset button R Certification seal Switch S2 free access Communication interfaces Optical interface Internal RS485 interface Interface 1 Comm. Security system cannot be changed Note The security system must be defined when ordering according to the requirements of the power supply company. unit Interface 2 Comm. P.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 4. For each register and each parameter. A distinction is also made between read access and write access.. Access protection for users static passwords P1.1 Introduction The data and parameters of the ZxD meters are protected against inadvertent or improper overwriting by a multi-stage security system... In order to simplify the handling and to ensure compatibility to the ZxD and ZxB meter families. It can no longer be altered in the field.2 Security levels The ZxD meters feature 16 different security levels (level 0 to 9 and A to F) with different access rights each. H 71 0200 0038 e en .e. If the IEC protocol is used exclusively for communication.g.4. P2 Px Py P. unit fixed link parametized link P. . 4. coded passwords P2. All levels are strictly independent i. the security characteristics of all levels have been partially or completely fixed.15.15 Security system This sub-chapter explains the meter security system. .15.15. handheld terminal PC etc. Access for manufacturer only Fig. 4. a higher level does not automatically bear all rights of the lower levels. it can be defined which level is required to read and which level is required to write. Link with password Security level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 to Level 14 Manufacturer level P1 Exteral unit e. Px. Py..User Manual Funktionsweise Landis+Gyr 4. there is a block of hardware switches. If this switch is closed (ON).15. Access is possible via the optical interface. The password protection may also be disabled for a particular access level. Switches protected by the certification seal Under the main face plate. the security attributes can be defined that must be fullfilled for a successful data access. flashing arrows appear in the display ( ). A password may be defined for each access level. the utility may chose whether a static 8-character password or a coded 7-character password should be used. The access to a certain level may be restricted so that it is only granted via selected communication channels.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . In addition. 4. the integrated interface (ZxD300/400 AR only) and both communication channels of the communication unit (ZxD300/400 AT only). Their position must be defined in order to gain access to a particular level: ON ON = Switch closed OFF = Switch open 1 2 3 S1: must always be open (OFF) S2: Parameterisation switch used for reparameterisations.User Manual Funktionsweise . For each access level. Communication channels Landis+Gyr 4.3 Security attributes The meter and the communication unit feature several access levels with different security attributes. S3: not used The position required to gain access must be defined for each level and will be checked by the meter in any case.15-6 H 71 0200 0038 e en . The status "does not care" is not possible. all meters are delivered with open switches (OFF = all switches in the down position) Entering the service menu Passwords It may be defined that access to a certain level will only be granted from the service menu. To enter the service menu the utility seal must be opened. Unless ordered otherwise.The following security elements can still be selected for some levels: • Password (if it is used) • Access via the external channels of the communication unit can be enabled or disabled. protected by the verification seal. a verification is required. All data can be read but there is no write access. phone numbers etc. Limited write access to settable data is possible. e. Level 0 Public Access 1 Data Collection Access possible via dlms and IEC protocol Security attributes without password without breaking a seal with static password without breaking a seal Access rights / application examples This access level is always available. 2 Utility Field Service with coded password without breaking a seal Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password 3 Utility Service without password breaking the utility seal necessary without password breaking the verification seal necessary 4 Extended Utility Service H 71 0200 0038 e en . Write access to settable and parameterisable data is granted. password setting etc.4. e. e. After the access. identification numbers. e. Reparameterisation in the utility.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .15-7 . Write access to settable data is granted. Readout of billing data by means of a handheld terminal or possibly by a central station. All billing data are readable. Limited write access possible.4 Security levels and their application The table below describes all levels with their security attributes and their typical application. All parameters and all billing data are readable. All parameters and all billing data are readable.User Manual Funktionsweise Landis+Gyr 4. Installation or maintance tasks in the field.15. time/date. device addresses.g.g. switching tables etc. battery operating time. All dlms meters can be accessed on this level. Installation or maintenance work in the utility. All parameters and all billing data are readable.g.g register clearing. All billing data are readable. Read access rights for all lower levels (0 to B) can be allocated. changing the access rights and the password of the utility administrator is possible. Extended service access for certified Landis+Gyr service centres. All parameters and most billing data are readable. Write access to a limited number of settable data is granted.g. a verification is required.15-8 H 71 0200 0038 e en . changes in the utility security system are possible: Read and write access rights can be adapted and all password can be changed. Service access of the distributor. 6 Remote Data Collection 7 Remote Service with static password without breaking a seal no access via the optical interface with static password without breaking a seal no access via the optical interface Readout of billing data by a central station. After the access. After the access. After the access. E Distributor Service with coded password breaking the verification seal necessary access via optical interface only Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password F Manufacturer Service special conditions breaking the verification seal necessary Landis+Gyr 4. All parameters and all billing data are readable. Access possible only via dlms protocol 8. 9. e. switching tables. A. identification numbers. a verification is required. a verification is required. device addresses. No access is granted via telemetering systems.User Manual Funktionsweise . D Utility Administrator with coded password breaking the verification seal necessary access via optical interface only Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password As level 4. In addition.g. Installation or maintenance work in connection with a central station. e.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Limited write access is possible. In addition.Level 5 Security attributes with static password Access rights / application examples Write access for the end user. B C Read Administrator with static password without breaking a seal Allocation of read access rights All parameter and all billing data are readable. Identical to level D. Reserved for future expansion. No access is granted via telemetering systems. time/date. phone numbers etc. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2 Example of access rights of the various data and parameter groups The allocation is defined by the application in the utility and by the national approval regulations.15. 4.15.5 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups In order to simplify the handling of the access rights. Parameter group N Parameter group 1 Parameter group 2 Parameter group 3 Configuration and calibration data Access according to special conditions Data and parameter groups parametized link Data group N Data group 1 Data group 2 Data group 3 to Security level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 to Level 14 Manufacturer level Fig. all data and parameters have been grouped. Read and write access rights for the various data and parameter groups can be allocated to the individual security levels.4.User Manual Funktionsweise to Landis+Gyr 4. It must be made when ordering the meter as it cannot be changed later on. H 71 0200 0038 e en .15-9 . 15-10 H 71 0200 0038 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Funktionsweise .Landis+Gyr 4. 16 Operating messages H 71 0200 0242 .en .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 4. 2003 Comments First edition Landis+Gyr Ltd.com Landis+Gyr 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .en .06.landisgyr.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.Revision history Index − Date 30. Feldstrasse 1 CH .16-2 H 71 0200 0242 .User Manual Revision history . 3 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16-8 H 71 0200 0242 .16.16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .16-3 .16.16 4.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 4.1 4.en .2 4.16-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.Table of contents 4.16. Landis+Gyr 4.16-4 H 71 0200 0242 .en .User Manual Table of contents .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . display. to the mobile phone of a servicing engineer of the power supply company) • Control of an arrow in the display • Drive for an output contact • Recording in the event log • Driving of energy.en .User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. output contact drive and recording in event log). They can be signalled in the following ways: • Transmission of an SMS message (short message) to a specific telephone number (e.16 Operating messages This sub-section describes the generation of operating messages and their possible effects (SMS message transmission. 4.g.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .16.1 Signalling of operating messages SMS messages can be sent either via an RS232 interface (integrated or in communication unit) via an external GSM modem or also directly via the GSM modem integrated in the communication unit CU-Gx.1 Survey ZMD300/ZxD400 meters can record important events and forward them as so-called operating messages. H 71 0200 0242 .4. Operating messages can be used to report important events to the power supply company to enable it to react accordingly and take appropriate action. 4. Operating messages only from software version B21 Note Only meters with software version B21 or higher can generate operating messages. demand or operating hours registers Important event Recording of operating message SMS control Sending SMS via GSM modem* * via RS232 interface and external GSM modem or via internal GSM modem of communication unit CU-Gx Arrow in display Output contact Event log Register drive Fig.16-5 .16. which can be supplied to the meter by the MAP120 service tool.3). be performed on the spot by the service engineer or via modem by the service department. The recording of an operating message actuates an internal control signal in the meter. A new operating message only actuates a further SMS message when one SMS message is fully completed.13.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .en .User Manual Function .16.16.16-6 H 71 0200 0242 . an SMS message is transmitted. refer also to section 4. Operation of a meter function Landis+Gyr 4. until reset by one of the following actions: • By a corresponding control instruction. This can. This can. Operating messages arriving during this time do not initiate a new SMS message.4. Sending an SMS message Operating messages can be used to send an SMS message to any desired telephone number (see section 4. When an operating message is recorded. which can be used to initiate various meter functions: • Control of an arrow in the meter display • Drive for an output contact • Drive for an energy. This can take a little time depending on the quality of the GSM connection or after a number of dialling repeats. • By a reset if the meter is parametrized so that operating messages are reset. for example. however.2 Recording of operating messages The power supply company can itself determine by parametrizing which important events are to be recorded as operating messages. It is not indicated which of the possible sources has led to the message. demand or operating hours register • Recording of the operating message in the event log This internal control signal remains active following the arrival of an operating message. be recorded in the event log by corresponding parametrization. The following events can be selected (the event number as defined in the event log is shown in parentheses.1 "Event log"): • Battery charge low (5) • Meter reset performed (8) • Voltage failure phase L1 (49) • Voltage failure phase L2 (50) • Voltage failure phase L3 (51) • Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" (89) • Error "Communication blocked" (94) Value of operating messages Note An operating message only states that an important event has taken place. While the internal control signal is active. Further operating message has no effect.internal control signal is reset .2 Example: meter behaviour with operating messages H 71 0200 0242 . since an SMS message already sent MAP Further operating message is recorded Operating message is reset with MAP120 or by a reset .only one transmission test . when the preceding message has been reset.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . demand or operating hours register Entry in event log Fig.255 mins) 1 t 2 t SMS message is actuated SMS message was sent 3 t Further SMS message actuated 1 2 t Sending of a test SMS message to check installation . 4.any SMS message in progress is ended Operating message recorded MAP Time t between dialling repeats (1 .internal control signal not set Up to three transmission tests per SMS message Defective SMS transmissions can be recorded in event log Internal control signal set The internal control signal is not influenced. for example. further operating messages have no effect. In this example three SMS messages are sent per operating message (can be parametrized from 1 to 5) at a time interval t (can be parametrized from 1 to 255 mins.16. Example The following diagram shows an example of interaction between operating messages.16-7 .en . The internal control signal is also not reset by a voltage failure. since this is already set Control of an arrow in the display Drive for an output contact Drive for an energy.no dialling repeat . The event log can therefore only record an operating message again. SMS control and the internal control signal.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.). provided it concerns an external GSM modem using no control conductors. but only the first message could be sent before the voltage failure. so that the service department knows that an important event has taken place at the meter specified. If.16-8 H 71 0200 0242 .User Manual Function . • The time between repeats of the SMS message can also be set by the parametrization (1 to 255 minutes). • If for any reason the GSM modem does not acknowledge a successful SMS transmission (no Acknowledge). An SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization is sent to a telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametrization. for example. SMS control The "SMS control" provides the following functions: • Initializing of the GSM modem used by a corresponding AT instruction. before the SMS message could be fully transmitted. For example the equipment number of the meter can be sent to the mobile phone number of the service department of the power supply company. When the meter is switched on again. three dialling repeats are parametrized per operating message. Landis+Gyr 4.g. If for any reason an SMS message could not be sent (because for example no connection could be made via the GSM network). three attempts are made to send the SMS message. • Transmission of an SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization to any desired telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametrization. this condition is stored in the meter. • A test SMS message can be sent to check the connection with the service department after installation of the meter.3 Sending an SMS message Operating messages can be used to send SMS messages via a GSM modem.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .en .4. the two outstanding SMS messages are sent after restoration of the voltage.16. after restoration of operating readiness of the GSM network) can similarly be recorded in the event log. the SMS message is completed following a waiting time of 2 minutes. • It can be determined by parametrization how many SMS messages are to be sent per operating event (maximum five dialling repeats). If there is a voltage failure in the meter shortly after the recording of an operating message. this can be recorded in the event log depending on the parametrization. This information is supplied to the GSM modem in the form of an AT instruction. Following a faulty SMS transmission the first successful SMS transmission (e. 16.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.3 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xR meters ZxD300/400xT In ZxD300/400xT meters a communication unit CU-Gx with internal GSM modem. or CU-Ax or CU-Bx with RS232 interface. Integrated RS232 interface GSM modem Fig.16. can be selected for sending SMS messages.ZxD300/400xR In ZxD300/400xR meters with an integral RS232 interface an external GSM modem can be connected to this interface to send an SMS message.16-9 .the external GSM modem is connected to an RS232 interface without control conductors (with integrated communication for the ZxD300/ 400xR) . Communication unit CU-Gx with GSM modem Communication unit with RS232 interface GSM modem Fig. to which an external GSM modem is connected. 4.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . H 71 0200 0242 .4 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xT meters The following boundary conditions must be satisfied to ensure communication between the meter and an external GSM modem for this application: • The meter must communicate with the external GSM modem via an RS232 interface.or if the control conductors of the RS232 interface of the communication unit are not used. 4.en . • The external GSM modem must be operated in so-called "transparent mode" if: . • The maximum bit rate at the RS232 interface must be set by parametrization to the communication speed of the external GSM modem. • The RS232 interface must have either the auto-detection function parametrized for the bit rate or in case of communication according to IEC 62056-21 the start bit rate parametrized the same as the maximum bit rate. ................. The valid initializing instructions for a specific GSM modem can be found in the manual for the relevant GSM modem.....CU-Gx: .......... The initializing can also consist of several............. the GSM modem must be initialized by an AT instruction.......................Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) ....... which are concluded in each case with <0D> (carriage return).. With the MAP120 service tool the initializing instruction can be parametrized in the meter........ individual AT instructions.. Treatment of AT instructions Note AT instructions are treated as ASCII character sequence (string)......Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ............. H 71 0200 0149 en .. even parity...... H 71 0200 0046 en • Basic information for communication applications .............CU-Bx: ...........en ........User Manual Function ....... Any desired AT instruction of maximum length 40 characters can be parametrized in the meter for this initializing......CU-Ax: .. H 71 0200 0145 en • Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media: ..16-10 H 71 0200 0242 ..Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem .................ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 ............. H 71 0200 0045 en .. H 71 0200 0147 en ...... H 71 0200 0150 en Initializing external GSM modem with an AT instruction If an external GSM modem is connected in transparent mode to the RS232 interface of the meter (for ZxDxxxxR or if the control conductors of the communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx for ZxDxxxxT are not used for control of the GSM modem)......................................... Further information concerning operation of ZxD meters with GSM modems can be found in the following documents: • User manuals for the various communication units: . The initializing instruction for a GSM modem generally consists of two AT instructions as shown by the following example: ATZ<0D>AT+CMGF=1<0D> The two AT instructions have the following significance: ATZ AT+CMGF=1 Reset of GSM modem (previous initializings are cancelled) The GSM modem is operated in string mode Landis+Gyr 4..........• The AT instructions used must have 7 bits fixed............................ H 71 0200 0044 en .............. This AT instruction can consist of maximum 60 characters with the following structure: AT+CMGS="+41vvnnnnnnn"<0D>xxxxxxxxx<1A> The individual parts of the AT instruction have the following significance: AT +CMGS= Introduction of AT instruction (Attention) Communication instruction for the GSM modem Determination of telephone number and SMS message "+41vvnnnnnnn" Telephone number of SMS recipient with country code (+41 for Switzerland). The telephone number to which the SMS message is to be sent and the text of the SMS message are combined in a single AT instruction. H 71 0200 0242 . It is not therefore possible to send different SMS messages dependent on one event. The telephone number and the text of the SMS message are thereby permanently stored in the meter and can only be modified by reparametrization. This can be parametrized in the meter with the MAP120 service tool.Parametrizing communication units Note When using communication unit CU-Gx (with integral GSM modem) or communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx (RS232 interface with control conductors and external GSM modem) the GSM modem is initialized by the corresponding control signals of the communication unit.g. can also be entered. but a blank initializing string must be parametrized in the meter. code vv without preceding zero (e. 79) and 7-digit call number nnnnnnn (e. The communication unit must be parametrized for this purpose (see relevant application notes). which for example defines the current location of the meter. The waiting time for acknowledgement from the GSM modem that the SMS has been sent is 15 seconds.16-11 . In this case no AT instruction must be parametrized to initialize the GSM modem in the meter.g. <0D> xxxxxxxxx Carriage Return Text of SMS message. can see from the meter number sent or the code of the power supply company for the location of the meter. This can comprise any desired sequence of characters (without initial and concluding characters) with the equipment number of the meter generally entered. The telephone number must be limited by initial and concluding characters.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Concluding character (CTRL-Z) <1A> The waiting time between transmission of the telephone number and the SMS message to the GSM modem is one second. for example the service department of the power supply company.User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4. which meter has sent the SMS message and can then take appropriate action.en . The SMS recipient. A special code defined by the power supply company. 1234567). however. The AT instruction for the test SMS message has the same structure as the AT instruction previously described for specifying the telephone number and the SMS message. and in the event that the GSM modem is not ready or cannot make connection in the GSM network. The status report can contain the following information: • SMS transmission was successful (1) • SMS transmission was not successful (0) • GSM modem is busy (2) • Incompatible communication unit: communication unit cannot send an SMS message (4) Landis+Gyr 4.en . The test SMS message is only sent once. a test SMS message can be sent with the aid of the MAP120 service tool to check the correct function of the meter and GSM modem. which can be read out at any time with the MAP120 service tool. for example.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Status report of SMS message The SMS controller generates a status report.16-12 H 71 0200 0242 . no further attempts at transmission are made.User Manual Function . The current status of the SMS controller can be checked in this way. The installer can send any SMS message to any desired telephone number (for example to his own mobile phone) to verify that the installation is configured correctly.Test SMS message Following installation. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 5 Control elements and displays H 71 0200 0035 e en . 2000 28.com Landis+Gyr 5-2 H 71 0200 0035 e en . 8.1999 17.2003 30. 6.09. Feldstrasse 1 CH .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.07. 10.2002 31.2000 29.landisgyr.03. 7.06.02.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 1.3. 12 and 13 Document also valid for ZxD310CT New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Chapter 5.04.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Revision history .1: Reference added to possibility of limiting to active values in the rolling operating display.Revision history Index − a b c d e Date 26. Landis+Gyr Ltd. 2.2 5.3.Table of contents 5 5.1.3 5.3 5.3.2 5.2.1 5.2.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 5-3 .3.1 5.1.1.3 5.1 5.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .4 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 Control elements ____________________________________________ 5-5 Display buttons _____________________________________________ 5-5 Control of display via optical interface ___________________________ 5-5 Reset button _______________________________________________ 5-6 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________ 5-7 Introduction ________________________________________________ 5-7 Basic layout ________________________________________________ 5-7 Index system _______________________________________________ 5-9 Types of display ____________________________________________ 5-10 Operating display ___________________________________________ 5-10 Display list ________________________________________________ 5-11 Service list ________________________________________________ 5-14 Optical test output __________________________________________ 5-16 H 71 0200 0035 e en .2 5.1 5.3 5.2 5. Landis+Gyr 5-4 H 71 0200 0035 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Table of contents . Illustrations Note The illustrations of the face plate and display in this section always show the ZMD300Cx or ZxD400Cx combimeter (with additional optical test output for reactive energy.1. layout and function of all operating elements and displays of the meters ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx.2 Control of display via optical interface All meters of the ZxD series have an "optical button" in addition to the "up" and "down" display buttons.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . together with direction of reactive power and quadrant display). 5. e.3. e.User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-5 . 1 Three-phase four-wire meter No 69 832 138 ZMD410CT41. The light signal acts like the "down" display button and controls the display in one direction from one value to the next. 5.1 Control elements The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have the two display buttons "down" and "up" and a reset button as conventional operating elements.1 Display buttons By pressing the lower display button "down". H 71 0200 0035 e en . generated by a torch. 1 imp kvarh 500 imp kWh Cl.g.1. This type of display control only functions when voltage is supplied to the meter. 5.4207 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 1999 Display button "up" Display button "down" T1 T2 T3 SET Test Fig. The display can also be controlled with the aid of a light source via the optical interface. the display changes to the previous value (refer also to 5. The optical interface serves to receive a light signal. the display changes to the next value in the list. through a protective glass disc in front of the meter. Landis+Gyr Dialog Readout Cl. By pressing the upper display button "up". 5.1 Display buttons The two display buttons "down" and "up" are placed on the main face plate (top) on the right of the liquid crystal display. The reader can also control the display at a distance from the meter depending on the light intensity from the source.5 Control elements and displays This chapter describes the appearance.g.2 "Display list"). however.3 "Service list"). Battery compartment R Reset button Communication unit (only with ZMD300xT or ZxD400xT) Fig.User Manual Control elements and displays .1. The reset button is normally used to perform a manual reset. To permit operation of the reset button the front door must be opened and therefore the factory seal removed. 5. pressing of the reset button produces the service menu (refer also to 5.2 Reset button under front door Landis+Gyr 5-6 H 71 0200 0035 e en . If the display check is displayed.3 Reset button The reset button is situated to the right of the battery compartment under the front door.3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .5. g. -P: export) Reactive power direction (not used with ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax) Phase voltages (flash if rotating field reversed) Battery status (charge voltage) Units field Index field (8 digits) Value field (8 digits) 12 arrow symbols for status information (e.2 5. 5. 5. This is switched on by pressing one of the display buttons and is extinguished automatically after a short time if no further button is pressed. 1 2 21 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fig.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .2 Basic layout The basic layout shows all the indication possibilities of the liquid crystal display.1 Liquid crystal display Introduction The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx are provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD).5.User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-7 . tariffs) Active power direction Shows always the sum of the three phases: positive active energy direction (imported from power company) negative active energy direction (exported to power company) negative active energy direction of individual phases (second arrow flashes).2.3 Basic layout of the liquid crystal display (LCD) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Active power direction (+P: import.2. The display can be provided with background lighting for easier reading (optional). H 71 0200 0035 e en . but only in the M circuit (ZMD300xx / ZMD400xx). ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Up to 8-digit values are displayed. A. The symbol appears if the charge voltage of the battery fitted is too low (provided the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery"). positive reactive energy direction negative reactive energy direction Quadrant display Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx in which quadrants the present measurement is made (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax): 1.. M. Landis+Gyr 5-8 H 71 0200 0035 e en ... Quadrant 3. Hz. VA. If the rotating field corresponds to that given by the parametrizing. h. k. The arrow points to a status description on the face plate.. Quadrant 2. Otherwise they flash every second. which define the value in the value field.. test mode. L2 and L3 are continuously lit. V. ..h. The following units are shown: W.Reactive power direction Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx always the sum of the three phases (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax). var. m³ (var and VA only for combimeters) Up to 8-digit indices are displayed. reset block.User Manual Control elements and displays . etc.. Battery condition Units field Index field Value field Arrow symbols An arrow symbol is an additional status indication for tariffs. Quadrant 4.. symbols L1. Quadrant Phase voltages Indication of presence of phase voltages. individual parts of the OBIS code can be omitted. The algorithms can deliver energy and demand quantities as well as other physical quantities. or the result of the processing of physical quantities according to various specific algorithms. LG. cosφ.9.User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-9 . C D E F To simplify the reading in the index field. Defines the abstract or physical data items related to the information source concerned. according to the tariffs in use.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . this value group can be used for further classification.3 Index system The information concerning which data are shown in the display is made with an index system and is supported by the unit over the value field. Defines the storage of data according to different billing periods. current or voltage. Examples 1. this value group can be used for further classification. This enables data from different sources to be identified. reactive power. Defines the further processing of measurement results to tariff registers. OBIS.e. the number of the input of a metering equipment having several inputs for the measurement of energy of the same or different types (e. The B:C.8.1 Local time Reference is made for examples to the following display list and the readout log (refer to chapter 6 "Communication interfaces"). The abstract or physical data C and type of data D must be shown. For abstract data or for measurement results for which tariffs are not relevant.D.2. i. VEOe.0 1 = Active energy import (all phases) 8 = Status 0 = Total 0. active power.5.F structure applies to OBIS (Object Identification System): B Defines the channel number. apparent power. registration units). Where this is not relevant.E. in data concentrators. etc. Defines types.g. e.g. The 8-digit index field permits all previously known index systems such as DIN. H 71 0200 0035 e en . 5. e. it replaces the normal operating display and the meter no longer operates. In the event of a fatal error. which appear in the display after pressing a button.3 Types of display The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx has the following three types of display: • Operating display The values specified by the parametrizing are shown as a rolling display in the operating display. in meters with numerous energy and demand registers. 5. the present tariff) or as rolling display (several values alternate at a fixed rate. This can consists of one or more values. The display buttons permit scrolling up and down in the list. According to parametrization.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . This can be parametrized as fixed display (only one value present.g. An extended display list – the service list – is available there with additional values. The display is always in operating mode when the display buttons are not operated. The values themselves and also the sequence can be parametrized.1 Operating display The values always displayed are considered the operating display.3. • Display list This comprises all values. this can be permanently included in the operating display.User Manual Control elements and displays . The meter returns automatically from the display list to the operating display after a defined time. e.5. every 15 seconds).4 Example of a fixed display Limiting to active values in rolling operating display Note In meters with software version B21 or higher it is possible by parametrization to limit the rolling display to active values.g.g. Error message Fig. This helps to keep the rolling display clear. The meter can generate an error message on the basis of self-tests. e. • Service list The user can set the meter to service mode by pressing the reset button starting from the display check.5 Example of an error message (unsufficent battery voltage) In case of an error message the procedure described in chapter 9 "Error measages and measures in event of faults" should be followed. 5. running mean value with status of integrating period Fig. Landis+Gyr 5-10 H 71 0200 0035 e en . * Values + R Service menu Display list Value 1 .2 Display list Operating display . H 71 0200 0035 e en . = as required (or) * = main values only Display check Brief operation (< 2s) of the display button "down" or "up" causes change of the operating display. * + . = press "up" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "down" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "up" button longer (> 2 s) = press "down" button longer (> 2 s) Fig.5.: to the display check: All segments of the display are operated here. R = press reset button + = together .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . * Value n . . 5. D isplay check . e.3. * Event log + End Values End .6 Display list survey .User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-11 . * Data profile Values Value 2 . This can prevent incorrect readings. The index and value fields should be checked each time for missing segments.g. Display menu . * . Value display The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. "Event log" etc. e. "Display list" (standard data): The menu item only appears when several menu items exist. Examples of values in a display list: Reset counter Date of resetting stored value 03 (March) Cumulated maximum demand active power Landis+Gyr 5-12 H 71 0200 0035 e en .User Manual Control elements and displays . "Data profile". The preceding menu item is displayed again by briefly pressing the "up" display button.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The first menu item appears again after the last item.g. normally the error message: The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value. The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed. The first menu item appears.Display menu Pressing the display button "down" or "up" again briefly changes to the display menu or directly to the display list. Otherwise direct entry is made to the display list.g. The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization. but no stored values. A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the display menu. e. Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list. H 71 0200 0035 e en .User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-13 .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Active energy present status Reactive energy present status Battery hours counter Status of signals at control terminals Present voltage phase 1 Present current phase 1 Number of total voltage failures To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). * + . = press "up" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "down" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "up" button longer (> 2 s) = press "down" button longer (> 2 s) Fig. D isplay check R Service menu . Display menu Service list Value 1 . . * Others + End Values End . 5.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3. R = press reset button + = together . * Value n . = as required (or) * = main values only Landis+Gyr 5-14 H 71 0200 0035 e en .2 "Load profile".3 Service list Operating display . Navigation within the load profile display takes place as described in section 4. * Set mode Values Value 2 .User Manual Control elements and displays . * . 5.01) is shown as follows: The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds).13.Load profile The "Load profile" menu item for selection in the display menu (denoted P. * Values + .7 Service mode survey . The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization.4. etc. The procedure is described under "Changing values in set mode" in chapter 8. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value.Service menu Pressing the reset button during the display check changes the display to the service menu or directly to the service list. "Test mode on/off".User Manual Control elements and displays Landis+Gyr 5-15 . "Service list" (service data): The menu item only appears if there are several items present. battery hours counter.1 "Event log". The preceding menu item appears again by pressing the "up" button briefly. Value display The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds) (as for the display list) The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Otherwise direct entry is made to the service list. To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list. but no stored values. Navigation within the event profile display takes place as described in section 4.13. e. A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). The first menu item appears.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . etc. Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the service menu.). The first item appears again following the last menu item "End". Set mode Values can be changed in the value display of the set mode with the aid of the reset button and display buttons (for setting time and date. H 71 0200 0035 e en .98) is shown as follows: Event log The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds).g. e. The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed. "Set mode".g. The "Event profile" menu item for selection in the service or display menu (denoted P. identification numbers. 4 Optical test output The optical test outputs – one for active energy in all meters and a second for reactive energy in combimeters – are fitted in the main face plate above the liquid crystal display. Landis+Gyr Dialog Readout Cl. 1 imp kvarh 500 imp kWh Cl.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .5. 5. They transmit visible red pulses corresponding to the current measured values (active and reactive energy).User Manual Control elements and displays . 1 Three-phase four-wire meter No 69 832 138 ZMD410CT41. See also chapter 8 "Maintenance and service".8 Optical test outputs The optical test outputs are used for testing the meter.4207 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 2003 Optical test output reactive energy (combimeters only) T1 T2 T3 SET Test Optical test output active energy Fig. Landis+Gyr 5-16 H 71 0200 0035 e en . en .ZMD400 AT / CT ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL 6 Communication interfaces H 71 0200 0247 .Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 AT / CT . ZFD400 AT / CT .6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.ZMD400 AT / CT .2003 Comments First edition Landis+Gyr Ltd.com Landis+Gyr 6-2 H 71 0200 0247 .03.en .User Manual Revision history . Feldstrasse 1 CH .landisgyr.Revision history Index − Date 31.ZMD300 AT / CT . 4 6.ZFD400 AT / CT .3 6.8.1 6.3 6.1 6.8 6.en .ZMD400 AT / CT .9 Communication interfaces ____________________________ 6-5 Survey ____________________________________________________ 6-5 Optical interface _____________________________________________ 6-6 S0 interface ________________________________________________ 6-6 RS232 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 RS485 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 CS interface ________________________________________________ 6-8 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________ 6-9 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________ 6-10 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13 H 71 0200 0247 .8.Table of contents 6 6.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 6-3 .6 6.ZMD300 AT / CT .8.2 6.2 6.7 6.5 6. ZFD400 AT / CT .en .Landis+Gyr 6-4 H 71 0200 0247 .ZMD300 AT / CT .User Manual Table of contents .ZMD400 AT / CT . It can be fitted and removed at any time in the field without touching the calibration seal.) or • for recording metering pulses for other physical media.1 Survey The ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters have an optical interface for communication on the spot via a read head using a wide range of communication interfaces. 6.ZMD400 AT / CT . The communication devices are accommodated in an easily exchanged communication unit. An initial fitting as well as retrofitting without re-parametrizing of the meters is possible with any version of communication unit.User Manual Communication interfaces RS485 Gy rD S02 nd V~ Landis+Gyr 6-5 .en . GSM modem etc. 6. M-Bus. gas or heat (S0 interface). such as water.ZFD400 AT / CT .6 Communication interfaces This section describes the functions and application possibilities of all communication interfaces of the ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters and indicates the possibilities for data readout. For fitting and removal of the already parametrized communication units the installation personnel do not require any special knowledge of communications.ZMD300 AT / CT . CS. • for remote scanning of meters (RS232. which is plugged in under the front door of the meter and secured by a factory seal. Modern plug connections ensure a rapid and faultless connection of the communication units. CO Rx Tx 99 N Kle Te mme rm n Co ina decke uvr l co l e ve A C born r e DC 10 0 -2 30 + 99 90 01 -2 CU -G 4 + - is + S01 La ia lo gC U- G4 Fig. PSTN modem. RS485.1 Simple fitting of the communication unit H 71 0200 0247 . en .g. CU-D2. CU-M1. divided into five basic versions: • Communication units CU-Ax with RS232. i. 6.8.22bis or V. 2 S0 interfaces are provided in each of the communication units CU-A1.12 "Serial interface".ZMD300 AT / CT .g. • for communication with a Landis+Gyr MAP120 service tool or a Landis+Gyr MAP190 parametrization editor tool. CU-G4 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual). e. RS485 and S0 interfaces The relevant version is designated with a number inserted instead of "x" (e. CS and S0 interfaces • Communication units CU-Bx with RS485. CU-G5).3) • as "optical key". It is situated at top right on the main face plate (see also chapter 3 "Mechanical constuction") and serves: • for automatic data recording on the spot by means of suitable acquisition unit (hand-held terminal) (see section 6. RS485 and S0 interfaces • Communication units CU-Gx with GSM modem.2 Optical interface The optical interface to IEC 62056-21 is a serial. CU-B1.Versions The following versions of communication units (CU) are currently available. The technical data for the optical interface are given in section 2.User Manual Communication interfaces . CU-M4.g.1. Landis+Gyr 6-6 H 71 0200 0247 . as receiver of a light signal. other meters with transmit contact for fixed valency pulses) for processing in the meter. generated by a flashlight acting like the "down" call-up button (refer also to section 5. RS232 and S0 interfaces • Communication units CU-Dx with M-Bus • Communication units CU-Mx with PSTN modem(V.34).e. CU-A1.g. 6. RS232. CU-B2. to input formatted commands (see section 8.2 "Display control via optical interface").3 S0 interface The S0 interface (pulse input) serves to accept external pulse transmitters (e.2.1) • for performing service functions.ZFD400 AT / CT . e. bi-directional interface.ZMD400 AT / CT . The technical data for the S0 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with S0 interface. Application of commercially available modem possible without difficulty . CU-M1.en . The technical data for the RS232 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS232 interface. It is present in the communication units CU-B1.Optimum behaviour with poor connections . The technical data for the RS485 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS485 interface. CU-B4. CU-M4. for remote reading of meter data or performance of service functions from a central station • to provide a direct connection to the RS232 interface of a computer. CU-B4.g. The RS232 interface of the communication unit is available in 2 different versions: • as basic version without control lines for the connection of an external modem with sufficient intelligence of its own or • as extended version with control lines for the connection of a transparent external modem. asynchronous. e. CU-G3 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual) and serves: • for the connection of an external modem (intelligent or transparent).6.User Manual Communication interfaces Landis+Gyr 6-7 . CU-B2. It is present in the communication units CU-A1. 6. etc.Maximum possible baud rate can be used without danger of buffer overflow . The use of this version has the following advantages: .5 RS485 interface The RS485 interface is a serial bi-directional interface. Up to 32 locally installed meters can be connected for example via the RS485 interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem.ZFD400 AT / CT . CU-A2. bi-directional interface.). CU-A5.ZMD400 AT / CT . in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values.Support of time-windows. time/date.ZMD300 AT / CT . CU-B1. CU-G1 and CUG4 (see corresponding user manual). serial.Limiting of maximum connection and idle time possible .4 RS232 interface The RS232 interface is an asymmetric. H 71 0200 0247 . passive current interface (current loop).7 M-Bus interface The serial M-bus interface is present in communication unit CU-D2 (see corresponding user manual). 6.en . With the M-Bus interface up to 250 devices (electricity.). etc.6. that an already existing M-Bus infrastructure can be further used. The technical data for the CS interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with CS interface.User Manual Communication interfaces . Landis+Gyr 6-8 H 71 0200 0247 . water. i.6 CS interface The CS interface is a serial. CU-A2 and CU-A4 (see corresponding user manual). in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values. gas or heat meters) can be connected via a repeater to a communication path in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values. etc.ZMD400 AT / CT . The use of the M-Bus physical layers (the M-Bus protocol is not used) has compared with the customary use of a RS485 bus the advantage. The technical data for the M-bus interface are given in the user manual for the communication unit CU-D2. time/date.ZMD300 AT / CT .e. no new cabling is necessary. time/date.).ZFD400 AT / CT . It is present in communication units CU-A1. bi-directional. Up to 4 locally installed meters can be connected via the CS interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem. 1 Data readout via optical interface Procedure: 1. Further data are then accessible depending on the parametrization.8.ZMD400 AT / CT . H 71 0200 0247 .User Manual Communication interfaces Landis+Gyr 6-9 . • Automatic data readout via the optical interface according to 6. 5.6. 4. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically downwards). Start the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). For readout according to DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) the data requested by the readout unit are read out.ZMD300 AT / CT . 3. 2.8 Possibilities for data readout The power supply company can record the data stored in the meter on the spot at any time in two ways: • Reading the liquid crystal display of the meter. If the meter is fitted with the appropriate communication unit (see associated separate operating instruction) remote scanning of the meter data is also possible. Connect the cable of the reading head to the hand held terminal. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter.8. Remove the reading head from the meter again after completing the readout. Start the data readout on the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). The reading head is held magnetically. Readout data Note For readout to IEC 62056-21 all data determined by the parametrization are read out in the specified sequence. Only those data can be recorded which appear in the rolling operating display or can be selected with the call-up button. 6. laptop).1 with the aid of a hand held terminal) or other readout device (e.en .ZFD400 AT / CT .g. 2.9.2 (00-05-20) C.2 (086.8.6.8.1.ZMD300 AT / CT .0 (500) C.0 (0327468*kWh) 5.8.4*kW)(00-05-06 10:45) 1.73.0 (28) 0.3.8.8.0 (0145694*kvarh) 8.0.ZMD400 AT / CT .0 (00306) C.8.2.1*04 (202.8.74.9)(00-04-14 23:00) 1.0 (00157) C.6.en .2.1 (00-03-26) ! Significance Designation of meter (reply on transmit request) Error message 1st identification number Number of resets Time of last reset P max cumulated P max cumulated P max present with April stored value P max present with April stored value Active energy (import) with April stored value Active energy (import) with April stored value Reactive energy (inductive) with April stored value Reactive energy (inductive) with April stored value Total active energy Total reactive energy (inductive) Total reactive energy (capacitive) Time-of-day of readout Date of readout No.1 (0106103*kvarh) 5. The scope and sequence of values in the log is determined by the parametrization.04 (98-05-01 00:00) 1.2*04 (0078197) 5.ZFD400 AT / CT .2*04 (100.2 (15534.1 (500) C.3.1 (0244948*kWh) 1.8.4)(00-04-22 09:30) 1.2.1.User Manual Communication interfaces .7*kW) 1.7*kW)(00-05-04 22:30) 1.1*04 (0100734) 5.8.6.1 (192.2*04 (0036152) 1. of voltage failures of all phases Number of undervoltages Number of overvoltages Number of overloads (overcurrent) Active pulse constant Reactive pulse constant Date of last parametrization End of log Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2 Landis+Gyr 6-10 H 71 0200 0247 .1 (14:18:06) 0.0 (00000) C.2 (0039591*kvarh) 5. Log example /LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 F.9.8.1 (26068.F (00000000) 0.0 (00087) C.6.72.1*04 (0234520) 1.8.8*kW) 1.6.0 (0001452*kvarh) 0.1 (417242) 0.7.2 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) The data read out according to IEC 62056-21 are recorded in the form shown below.2 (0082520*kWh) 1.8. Notes The power supply company can select by parametrizing between a standard identification or its own identification.ZMD300 AT / CT .6... The standard identification has the following structure: /LGZ.g. ID1.ZMD400 AT / CT .. /LGZ 4.. /LGZ4\2 ZMD410. /LGZ 4. /LGZ4 \2.6. /LGZ4\2ZMD410 41... /LGZ4 \2... supplementary power supply) Software version The hyphen following the identification number and the tariff (1. 1.. /LGZ4\2\B14 12345678 Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr) Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter Meter Software version Identification number specified by parametrizing (maximum 8 characters) H 71 0200 0247 .1) denotes the type of resetting: *04 &04 Resetting made internally or remote controlled Resetting performed manually or with reset button R /LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 . ID1.. /LGZ4\2ZMD41041 00.. The identification is comprised as follows in this case: /LGZ.User Manual Communication interfaces Landis+Gyr 6-11 .1&04 Identification by the power supply company itself uses an identification number.g... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr) Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter Meter Type of measuring unit Basic version tariff section Additional functions (RCR.B14 Stored values e...1 (designation of ownership by the power supply company).1 (serial number) are available....1*04 e. /LGZ4\2 \B14..6..ZFD400 AT / CT .2 (any desired number) or ID2. 1.en . 3 Readout to DLMS While the readout according to IEC 62056-21 uses a protocol determined in advance. The sender feeds these items to a transport medium. cumulative maxima.User Manual Communication interfaces . DLMS specification Various meter manufacturers – including Landis+Gyr – together with related organizations. The only important thing is that the address of the recipient is clearly shown and that the letter is received.required by the receiver (e. Units with DLMS operate in a similar way. DLMS also concerns the interfaces. etc. etc. have compiled the language specification DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) and undertaken to use this in their equipment (meters. e. etc. tariff units. so that the items are received in the same form as supplied by the sender.ZMD400 AT / CT . The DLMS items • have an unmistakable name in the form of the EDIS identification number • contain the value in an exactly defined form and • are configured in a similarly exactly defined format. associated stored values.6.g. read and it can be seen from whom the letter originates. systems. transmission channels and system software. The way in which the postal department transports the letter is of no consequence to the sender and receiver. maxima. They provide the values . tariff units. Landis+Gyr 6-12 H 71 0200 0247 .).g. The company therefore has systematic access to specific values without being influenced by other values not required.termed items .ZMD300 AT / CT . In addition to end units such as meters.8. readout to DLMS enables the power supply company to configure the values to be read out individually. rolling mean values. energy statuses. This transmits them to the receiver. How the values reach the recipient is again immaterial for both parties. Items of this kind are number of resets with date and time.ZFD400 AT / CT . Objective Principle DLMS items DLMS is an item-oriented language. the telephone network. DLMS can be compared to sending a letter: the sender writes the address of the recipient on the letter and hands it to the post office for transport. control centre) and pass them via interface to the transport medium (channel).en . The objective of DLMS is to use a common language for data exchange in the energy measurement and other sectors. ............................................. H 71 0200 0099 en ................. H 71 0200 0045 en ........CU-Ax: .... H 71 0200 0105 en • User manuals for the various communication units: ......Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem ..............................................CU-Bx: ....................................................................... H 71 0200 0047 en .............................CU-Mx: ....... H 71 0200 0100 en ................................................6....... H 71 0200 0147 en .........................Point-to-point connection with internal PSTN modem ....Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (CS) .CU-Gx: .... H 71 0200 0152 en ............... H 71 0200 0155 en H 71 0200 0247 ........................ZMD400 AT / CT ......................CU-Bx: ........................................... H 71 0200 0148 en ........Point-to-point connection with external IP converter "MetcomTE2" ............................ H 71 0200 0146 en ......... H 71 0200 0151 en ...... H 71 0200 0150 en .......... H 71 0200 0101 en ....... H 71 0200 0044 en ................CU-Dx: ................ H 71 0200 0232 en .........Multiple connections with CS interfaces ....en ....................CU-Gx: ............. H 71 0200 0145 en • Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media: .............................................CU-Ax: .ZMD300 AT / CT .......................... H 71 0200 0046 en • Basic information for communication applications .......Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "US Robotics 56k" ............... H 71 0200 0154 en ............ZFD400 AT / CT ........................ H 71 0200 0149 en ..........User Manual Communication interfaces Landis+Gyr 6-13 .Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) . H 71 0200 0231 en ..................... • Product information for the various communication units: ...........Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "ELSA MicroLink ISDN" ..................CU-Mx: ............9 Further information sources about communication interfaces More detailed information about Landis+Gyr Dialog communication solutions can be found in the following documents.......................Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ...........Multiple connections with RS485 interfaces ....................................CU-Dx: . H 71 0200 0153 en ............................................... ..Multiple connections with M-Bus interfaces ..... All these documents as well as advisory services are available from the competent representative of Landis+Gyr Ltd.User Manual Communication interfaces ...en ...ZMD400 AT / CT . H 71 0200 0156 en The range of application notes of this kind available is being continually enlarged....ZMD300 AT / CT .......................ZFD400 AT / CT ..... Landis+Gyr 6-14 H 71 0200 0247 .. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 USER MANUAL 7 Installation and commissioning H 71 0200 0061 f en . 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.02.1999 17.2002 31.2002 02.06.User Manual Revision history .07.ZMD300 .2000 29.09.com Landis+Gyr 7-2 H 71 0200 0061 f en .landisgyr.2003 30.03.Revision history Index − a b c d e f Date 26.04.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Various corrections ZMD310CT with I max of 120 A ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Section 7. Feldstrasse 1 CH .7 "Commissioning and functional check" supplemented by check of communication device with test SMS message Landis+Gyr Ltd.2000 28.05. 2 7.2 7.3.1 7.Table of contents 7 7.5 7.4 7.6 7.ZMD300 .3.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 7-3 .1 7.7 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Connection with 3 phases and neutral ___________________________ 7-6 Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit) _____________ 7-6 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-7 Connecting meter ___________________________________________ 7-9 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-12 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-13 H 71 0200 0061 f en .3 7. Landis+Gyr 7-4 H 71 0200 0061 f en .User Manual Table of contents .ZMD300 . Touching live parts is dangerous to life.7 Installation and commissioning This chapter describes the installation and connection of meters for direct connection. 7.User Manual Installation and commissioning Landis+Gyr 7-5 .ZMD300 . in particular the safety regulations. • These persons must be familiar with and observe the normal local safety regulations. • Strictly observe the details in chapter 1 "Safety". as well as all information concerning safe operation in this chapter. Dangerous voltage Danger Dangers can arise from live electrical installations to which the meters are connected.1 Introduction The following personal and technical conditions must be fulfilled for installation and commissioning of the meters: • The work described below must only be performed by technically qualified and suitably trained persons. 7.2). • Before starting work check that the material and tools required are all present (as in chapter 7.2 Material and tools required The following material and tools are required for installation of the meters: • Correct meter (according to type designation and characteristic data on the face plate) with intact meter seal (calibration seals) • Correct meter connection diagram (on the rear side of the tariff face plate) • Fixing screws for fitting the meters on meter boards or similar device • Company seals • Screwdriver suitable for fixing screws • Size 1 screwdriver for screwless spring-loaded terminals • Screwdriver suitable for thrust screws of phase connections • Sealing pliers for company own seals • Drilling machine for fixing holes if necessary • Phase tester or universal measuring instrument • Buzzer H 71 0200 0061 f en . In addition. the necessary steps for checking the connections. commissioning of the meter and the final functional check are described. All safety information should therefore be strictly observed without fail. 7. Landis+Gyr 7-6 H 71 0200 0061 f en . however.3 Basic information for connecting meter It is recommended to use the following circuits whenever possible for connecting the meter to the various voltage levels.3.User Manual Installation and commissioning .2 Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit) A version ZFD300xx for the rarely encountered three-phase networks without neutral with 3 x 230 V is not foreseen.ZMD300 .1 Connection with 3 phases and neutral Neutral The neutral is normally looped through terminals 10 and 12. This avoids possible contact errors in the neutral conductor. 7.7.3.1 Connection with 3 phases and neutral L1 L2 L3 N Connecting fuses Consumer fuses 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 Loads Fig. make a simple connection between terminal 10 or 12 and the neutral. Some power supply companies. 7. Determine the desired form of fixing (open or covered meter mounting).7. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed.2 Meter suspension eyelet H 71 0200 0061 f en .ZMD300 . The meter should be mounted as follows on the meter board or similar device provided for this purpose (see also figure "Meter dimensions" in chapter 2. 3.2 "Technical data"): 1. open Case edge 206 covered 190 Raise latch slightly and push down over stop Stop Fig 7. If so. so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed. 2. This can be moved up or down over the stop as illustrated below. so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work.4 Mounting the meter Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. 4. Set the meter suspension eyelet in the relevant position. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live.User Manual Installation and commissioning Landis+Gyr 7-7 . Find the correct meter position for mounting the meter. ZMD300 . 7.height of suspension triangle for open mounting = 206 mm .3 Drilling plan 6. Unscrew the meter terminal cover. 8. 7. Landis+Gyr 7-8 206 or 190 mm respectively H 71 0200 0061 f en .height of suspension triangle for covered mounting = 190 mm 75 mm 150 mm Fig.5. Mark the three fixing points (suspension triangle as in following illustration) on the mounting surface provided: .horizontal base of suspension triangle = 150 mm .User Manual Installation and commissioning . Drill the three holes for the fixing screws. Fit the meter with the three fixing screws on the mounting surface provided. If so. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live.5 mm only cable is possible. 3. remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed. so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed.g. Owing to the terminal opening of 9. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work. so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed. 4 mm2) the connecting line must be placed in the indentation (stamping) of the current loops. so that it cannot shift sideways when tightening the terminal screws.g. Connecting conductor cross-section Note ZMD310CT with a maximum current of 100 or 120 A require connecting conductors of 35 mm2 cross-section. Insert the phase connecting wires in the relevant terminals (the terminals are numbered as shown in the connection diagram) and tighten the terminal screws firmly (torque 3 to 5 Nm).7. H 71 0200 0061 f en .User Manual Installation and commissioning Landis+Gyr 7-9 . The electrical connections to the meter should be made as follows according to the connection diagram: 1.5 Connecting meter Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. buzzer) to ensure that the right consumer is connected to the meter output. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. Ensure that the connecting line remains in the indentation when tightening.4 Cross-section through current loop conductor It is recommended to identify the beginning and end of the relevant conductors with a suitable test unit (e. Indentation (stamping) for smaller connection lines Current loop conductor Fig 7. Shorten the phase connecting wires to the required length and then strip them. Connecting the phase connection lines 2. With small conductor cross-sections (e.ZMD300 . 5 mm2 can be connected).Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board Pulse inputs Communication interfaces Communication unit U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs L1 L2 L3 N Phase connections Fig 7.6 Meter connections (example ZMD300xR) Power losses at the terminals Note Insufficiently tightened screws at the phase connections can lead to increased power losses at the terminals and therefore to undesirable heating.User Manual Installation and commissioning . If stranded wire is used. Shorten the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs to the required length and strip them for approx. it is recommended to provide it with ferrules for connection. A contact resistance of 1 mΩ causes a power loss of 10 W at 100 A ! Connecting the signal inputs and outputs 4. 5. Landis+Gyr 7-10 H 71 0200 0061 f en . 4 mm (wires and strands up to 2.5 Meter connections (example ZMD300xT) Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board Communication interface Interface board U1 U2 U3 N Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs L1 L2 L3 N Phase connections Fig 7.ZMD300 . The stripped part of the connecting wire should be shortened if necessary.7 C).6.7 C). .Insert a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig 7.User Manual Installation and commissioning Landis+Gyr 7-11 . The connecting wire is then firmly fixed (Fig 7. i. since this could damage the terminal.e.ZMD300 .8 B Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal C Damage to terminals Warning Never withdraw connecting wires with the terminal closed.7 A). Touching live parts is dangerous to life.7 B Connection in screwless spring-loaded terminals C Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The insulation of the connecting line must extend as far as the terminal indentation. this is performed in the reverse sequence: A Fig 7. .7 B).Withdraw the screwdriver. Connect the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs as follows to the screwless spring-loaded terminals (the terminals are numbered as shown on the connection diagram): . H 71 0200 0061 f en .Now place the stripped connecting wire in the lower opening and hold it there securely (Fig 7. . there must be no further bare part of the connecting line visible above the terminal edge (as shown in Fig 7. ca m 4m A Fig 7. If a connecting wire must be disconnected again for any reason. Terminal 12 of meter → Consumer load Landis+Gyr 7-12 H 71 0200 0061 f en .Terminal 3 of meter → Consumer load 6. Has the correct meter (identification number) been installed at the measuring point of the relevant consumer ? Is the calibration connection closed (voltage jumper between phase and voltage circuit) (no contact pin inserted to lift the contact spring) ? Are the phase connections centered in the current terminals ? Are all thrust screws for the phase connections and neutral tightened sufficiently ? Are all conductors of phase 1 connected correctly according to the connection diagram ? .6 Check of connections Effects of connection errors Note Only a properly connected meter measures correctly ! Every connection error results in a financial loss for the power company ! Before putting into operation the following points must be checked again and corrected if necessary: 1. 7. 4.7. Are all conductors of phases 2 and 3 connected correctly according to the connection diagram (follow conductors similar to phase 1) ? Are all conductors of the neutral connected correctly according to the connection diagram ? . 3.ZMD300 . 5.Neutral isolator of consumer → terminal 10 of meter .Output of consumer fuse → terminal 1 of meter .User Manual Installation and commissioning . 2. 7.7 Commissioning and functional check Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The consumer fuses must be re-inserted before commissioning and functional check of the meter. If the terminal cover is not screwed tight, there is a danger of contact with the connection terminals. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant consumer fuses should therefore be removed before making any modifications to the installation and these kept in a safe place until completing the work to prevent anyone re-inserting them unnoticed. Prerequisites for commissioning and functional check Note If no mains voltage is present, commissioning and functional check must be performed at a later date. The installed meter should be put into service and checked as follows: 1. 2. 3. Insert the preliminary fuses removed for installation. The meter is switched on. Check whether the operating display appears correctly (no error message). Check on the display whether all three phases L1, L2 and L3 are indicated and show the right phase sequence. - If one phase is not present, the relevant symbol is absent. This is also the case if the voltage is less than 20 V. - With the normal phase sequence L1-L2-L3 the symbols are displayed continuously. - If, however, the meter is connected with reversed phase sequence (e.g. L2-L1-L3) the symbols flash. The direction of field rotation (clockwise or anticlockwise) is determined by the parametrization. This has no influence, however, on the measuring behaviour of the meter. Fig 7.9 Phase sequence indication 4. 5. Remove all consumer fuses. Insert the consumer fuse of phase 1 and check the display of the energy direction: +P to right. If the energy direction arrow P points to the left, the input and output of phase 1 are interchanged. If the meter displays no energy direction, the voltage jumper is open, the consumer fuse defective or the neutral is not connected. Remove the consumer fuse of phase 1 again. Landis+Gyr 7-13 6. H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning 7. 8. 9. Repeat the same test for the other phases as in points 5 and 6. Further values (e.g. phase voltages) can be checked in the service list obtained via the service menu if parametrized. Check the tariff displays and switch the control voltages to the tariff inputs on and off. The arrow symbols of the tariff display must change. 10. If the meter is connected to a meter readout system via the electrical interface, a check should be made of correct functioning of the data transmission. 11. If a GSM modem is connected to the meter, the SMS transmission function should be checked by sending a test SMS message, e.g. to your own mobile telephone (refer also to section 4.16.3 "Sending an SMS message"). 12. Screw on the terminal cover if the meter is operating correctly. Otherwise first locate and eliminate the error. 13. Seal the terminal cover with two company seals. 14. Set the current date and time with the relevant formatted command (see 11.3) or in the set mode (see 11.4). 15. Close the front door. 16. Re-seal the front door. Landis+Gyr 7-14 H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 8 Maintenance and service H 71 0200 0041 e en Revision history Index − a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 28.09.2000 18.04.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision. Section 8.4 new. Various corrections ZMD310CT/400AT included ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 8-2 H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Revision history Table of contents 8 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.3 8.4 8.5 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 Changing the battery ________________________________________ 8-11 H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-3 Landis+Gyr 8-4 H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Table of contents 8 Maintenance and service This chapter describes the necessary maintenance and servicing work. This includes checking and testing of the meter, using formatted commands, etc. 8.1 Meter check The following points should be checked on the meters periodically (e.g. with every data readout): • Is the meter dry and clean (particularly display and optical interface) ? • Is the meter in operation and serviceable (operating display present and sensible) ? • Are all calibration and factory seals undamaged ? • Has the meter internal self-test performed regularly recorded any error since the previous check (check on the display or readout log). • Have the values of the energy registers changed within reasonable limits since the last data readout (no unauthorised manipulations made to the installation) ? • Does the symbol appear in the liquid crystal display ? Continue as described in chapter 9 "Eror messages and measures in event of faults" if errors or irregularities are found. 8.2 Meter testing Meter tests should be performed at periodic intervals according to the valid national regulations (either on all meters or on specific random samples). In principle the meters should be dismantled for this purpose according to the instructions in section 9.3 "Disconnecting meter" and replaced by a substitute meter. The meter test can also be performed on the spot in certain circumstances. 8.2.1 Test mode The test mode permits increasing the resolution of the energy registers by 1 to 3 digits. This allows the power supply company to carry out the so called measuring unit test in sufficiently short time. In test mode the same registers shown as rolling display in the operating display are always displayed, but with high resolution and not rolling. The energy registers comprise a total of 12 digits. A maximum of 8 digits, however, is shown on the display. The effective number of digits shown and the number of decimal places are determined by the parametrizing. For the test mode more decimal places are normally parametrized (maximum 4) to permit a quicker test of the transmission to the energy registers. H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-5 Display in normal mode Register , Display in test mode Fig. 8.1 Display changeover normal mode – test mode Changeover from normal to test mode and back is made by formatted commands (see chapter 8.3 "Input of formatted commands") or manually in the service menu. In test mode the optical test output for active energy can also provide reactive energy pulses depending on the parametrizing. Reactive energy pulses are supplied to this test output if the register shown on the display represents a reactive energy register. Active energy pulses are supplied for all other measured values shown as in normal operating mode. 8.2.2 Measuring times For technical reasons greater measuring deviations can occur during shortterm measurements. It is therefore recommended to use sufficiently long measuring times in order to achieve the required accuracy. Table of measuring times required: ZMD400xx ZFD400xx Un = 58 to 230 V In= 1 A, 5 A Current [% In] 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 Measuring uncertainty 0.1 % 3P cosϕ=1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 1P 1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 3P 0.5 90 s 40 s 15 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s Measuring uncertainty 0.05 % 3P cosϕ=1 80 s 40 s 16 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 1P 1 80 s 40 s 16 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 3P 0.5 160 s 80 s 32 s 18 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase Landis+Gyr 8-6 H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service ZMD300xx Un = 230 V Ib = 5 A Current [% Ib] 5 10 20 50 100 1000 2000 2400 Measuring uncertainty 0.1 % 3P cosϕ=1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 1P 1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 3P 0,5 90 s 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase 8.2.3 Optical test output The red optical test outputs on the meter above the LCD should be used for meter testing. These supply pulses at a frequency dependent on the meter constant R, whereby the rising edge is always decisive for the test. Note that the digital signal processing provides a delay of 2 seconds between the instantaneous power at the meter and the appearance of the pulses at the optical test outputs. No pulses are lost. The number of pulses per second for the desired power is obtained by multiplying the meter constant R by the power in kW divided by 3600. Example: Meter constant R = 1000 Power P = 35 kW f-test output = R x P / 3600 = 1000 x 35 / 3600 = 10 imp/s The optical test outputs are continuously lit at creep. 8.2.4 Creep test A test voltage Up of 1.15 Un is used for the creep test (no-load test) to IEC 61036 (e.g. Up = 265 V with Un = 230 V). Procedure: 1. 2. Disconnect the meter from the mains for at least 10 seconds. Then switch on the test voltage Up and wait approx. 10 seconds. After this time the energy direction arrows must disappear. The red optical test outputs are permanently "lit". Switch on test mode (high resolution). The meter must not deliver more than one pulse during the creep test. Check the energy levels for changes in test mode. They must not increase by more than the value of one pulse (see face plate). 3. 4. H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-7 The meter must remain in creep. 10 mA with In = 5 A).User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service . The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The meter must remain in creep. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit". Increase the load current to 0.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.e. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cosϕ = 1.g. 2. Apply a load current of 0.g. The optical test output for reactive energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit". 20 mA with Ib = 5 A).02 % of the nominal current In (e.2 % In for the ZxD410xx (i. ZMD300Cx Procedure: 1. The meter must remain in creep. The meter must remain in creep.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.2. 10 mA with In = 5 A).4 % Ib (i. 8. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .1 % In for the ZxD405xx or 0. Increase the load current to 0. Apply a load current of 0. 20 mA with Ib = 5 A).02 % of the nominal current In (e.g.4 % Ib (i. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sinϕ = 1. Apply a load current of 0. Landis+Gyr 8-8 H 71 0200 0041 e en .6 Starting test reactive part Procedure: 1.e. ZxD400Cx 2.8. ZMD300xx Procedure: 1.2 % In (i. The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds. 2. The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds.e.5 ZxD400xx Starting test active part Procedure: 1. The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit". Apply a load current of 0. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cosϕ = 1.2. 2. Increase the load current to 0. Increase the load current to 0. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sinϕ = 1.g.e. Current messages .Demand messages . The user of formatted commands.Under. H 71 0200 0041 e en .User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-9 .8. however. • Initiation of reset via interface • Neutralize reset inputs KA/KB • Set / reset reset counter • Set / reset energy registers • Set / reset total energy registers • Set / reset demand maximum registers • Set / reset power factor registers • Reset stored values • Reset battery hours counter • Reset voltage failures registers • Switch on / off increased resolution (test mode) of energy registers • Delete error messages • Change passwords P1.and overvoltages .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3 Input of formatted commands The following operating data or meter characteristics can be modified by the input of formatted commands. The following commands can be used both according to IEC 62056-21 and also with DLMS: • Set time / date • Set identification numbers for the power supply company and for the manufacturer (by line).P2 and W5 • Reset load profile • Reset event profile The following commands can only be executed with DLMS: • Reset event register .Power factor messages • Set thresholds for messages Formatted commands are transferred to the meter with a suitable aid (hand held terminal or laptop) via the optical interface or via an interface circuit of the communication unit. must have the necessary access authorization according to the security system. 5.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. 3. 6. 9. Open the front door. until the first value for setting is displayed. 4. 5. Check that the desired effect takes place. Remove the reading head from the meter again after transmission. 6. identification numbers and battery hours counter) can be changed with the aid of the reset button and display buttons. The first digit of the value to be changed flashes. The display changes to the service menu with the first menu item. Procedure: 1. 8. The reading head is held magnetically. 2.Procedure: 1.User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service . Press the reset button. so that the reset button is accessible. 2. The next digit of the value to be changed flashes. Input the required formatted commands to the meter (according to the details in the operating instructions for the communication software used with the hand held terminal or laptop). 7. Press the "up" or "down" display button for longer (at least 2 seconds). Remove the front door seal.g. Change the digit by pressing the "up" (increase) or "down" (decrease) display button as required.4 Changing values in set mode In set mode some values (date and time. Landis+Gyr 8-10 H 71 0200 0041 e en . without the use of auxiliary aids such as hand-held terminal or laptop. Otherwise all digits flash together. 10. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter. e. Select the value to be changed with the "up" or "down" display button. 3. that the modified identification number has been correctly stored in the meter (display or readout log) or if the test mode has been switched on (arrow symbol on display). 4. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically down). 8. The display changes from operating display to display check. Start the hand held terminal or laptop (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). Press the reset button. Press the reset button. if it was not previously the last digit. Connect the cable of the reading head to the handheld terminal or laptop. Press the "down" display button as many times briefly. until the menu item "Set mode" (SEt) is displayed. Replacement battery Note Only use a lithium battery with a rated voltage of 6 V and the same construction as the original battery as a replacement.5 Changing the battery If the meter is provided with a battery. If required. Close the front door.1 in service mode). • The battery charge indicates less than 4. • The battery operating hours counter indicates over 80. The 10 years depend on the product and on the age of the battery when inserting it into the meter. Dangerous voltage on contacts in the battery compartment Danger The contacts in the battery compartment may have mains voltage applied (F circuit). Re-seal the front door. invalid date or time) all digits continue flashing and the input must be repeated. this must be changed if one of the following events occurs: • The symbol appears in the liquid crystal display. until all digits of the changed value flash together. 15. After pressing the reset button the new value is given a plausibility test and stored if the test result is positive. The next value for setting is displayed.0 in service mode). 13. 16.6. Ensure that the contacts are never touched.000 hours (can be read under code C.8 V (can be read under code C. • The battery has been in the meter for more than 10 years (preventive servicing). further values can be changed as described in steps 7 to 12.g.6. the operating display appears again. Therefore only remove the battery with the existing battery holder and insert the new battery only with the battery holder. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all digits of the value to be changed.11.User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-11 . Press the reset button to confirm the new value (the value set can be rejected and the previous value retained by pressing the "up" or "down" display button). Meters with or without battery Note Only meters parametrized as "fitted with battery" have the symbol and the battery operating hours counter. It is recommended to note the date of insertion on the battery. 14. H 71 0200 0041 e en . If you press the "up" and "down" display buttons simultaneously.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 12. In the event of an error (e. 8. 2. 8.3 Removing the battery 4. Fig. Remove the front door seal.2 Battery compartment 3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Press on the latch of the plastic battery holder until it releases and then withdraw the battery holder with the old battery. H 71 0200 0041 e en . Open the front door. 8.User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service . 5. Fig.Procedure: 1. Draw the old battery from the holder and insert the new battery. The battery compartment is on the left below the liquid crystal display. Landis+Gyr 8-12 Mark the current date on the new battery. Reset the battery hours counter to zero with the relevant formatted command (see 8. Re-seal the front door. 8.3) or in the set mode (see 8.4). H 71 0200 0041 e en . Close the front door. check the time-of-day and date without power applied and set these values again if necessary. Push the battery holder with battery in the battery compartment until the latch engages.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 8. Dispose of old battery as hazardous waste in accordance with local regulations. Checking time-of-day and date Note After inserting the battery. 9. 7. 10.User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition Landis+Gyr 8-13 .4 Battery holder and battery 6.Fig. User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service .Landis+Gyr 8-14 H 71 0200 0041 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 9 Error messages and measures in event of faults H 71 0200 0042 e en . 10 and 12 New error message: check-sum stored values / event log ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.Revision history Index − a a b c d e Date 26.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 8.User Manual Revision history .2000 06.05.2000 29.02.09.07.2002 31.04.1999 17.landisgyr.com Landis+Gyr 9-2 H 71 0200 0042 e en .03.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Index field display changed Changes on pages 5.2000 28.2002 02. Feldstrasse 1 CH .04. 1 9.2 9.3.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .4 Error messages and measures in event of faults ___________ 9-5 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 Structure of an error message__________________________________ 9-5 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 Disconnecting meters________________________________________ 9-11 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx) _______________ 9-13 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14 H 71 0200 0042 e en .1.1 9.3 9.2 9.3.1.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 9-3 .1 9.2 9.Table of contents 9 9. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Landis+Gyr 9-4 H 71 0200 0042 e en .User Manual Table of contents . 9.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults .9 Error messages and measures in event of faults This chapter explains the significance of error messages and indicates action to be taken in the event of their appearance and for functional disturbances. 9.1 Error message from meters of the ZxD series Meters of the ZxD series all use the same format for error messages.F" or "FF" in the display.1 Error messages The meters regularly perform an internal self-test.1 Structure of an error message An error message has the following form: Fig.F(00000000) = no error).4 "Repairing meters"). This checks the correct function of all important parts.3 "Input of formatted commands"). whereby the groups have the following significance: Structure F.2 Significance of error message Landis+Gyr 9-5 H 71 0200 0042 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .F 00 00 00 00 Error for write/read access Time-base error (clock) Check-sum error Other errors Error messages of ZxD meters Fig. In the event of a serious error detected. This consists of four groups of 2 digits each.1. 9. If nothing else is specified in the following description of the error groups. the error messages can only be deleted with formatted commands (see 8. the meters display an error code. The removal of the meter and its repair are also described. The error code is always included in the readout log (error code F. depending on the parametrization and significance of the error. If the error occurs again. This error code appears as an eight-digit figure together with "F. the meter should be removed and sent to the responsible service and repair center (according to 9. 9. 3 "Input of formatted commands" or 8.Each group has two digits written in hexadecimal notation and can therefore have the values 0 to 9 and letters A to F. Significance: F. The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and 3 (both error messages set).3 Group 1 of error message The first digit in the first group has no significance. Both digits each form the sum of the individual values of 4 possible types of error as shown in the following diagrams. Landis+Gyr 9-6 H 71 0200 0042 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . since no error messages are assigned to it.F 02 00 00 00 Invalid time / invalid date The meter has found that the calendar clock has stopped at some time. The error is deleted automatically when the battery voltage has again reached a sufficient value (e.2 Error groups Group 1 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Insufficient battery voltage Invalid time / invalid date * * * * * * * not used Time-base errors (clock) Fig 9. 9. The calendar clock will stop when the Supercap is discharged following separation from the mains. Otherwise there is no check of the battery condition. but shows the wrong time or date. after inserting a new battery as described in 8. The clock is running.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults .5 "Changing the battery"). This error message only appears if the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery". F.1.F 01 00 00 00 Insufficient battery voltage Battery missing or discharged. The error is deleted automatically when the time and date have been set correctly by the relevant formatted command or manually in the set mode (see 8.g.4 "Changing values in set mode"). The calendar clock can display an invalid time or date. F. The meter can contain faulty data or fail.4 Group 2 of error message In the second group both digits can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set).F 00 4x 00 00 Error in the communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the communication unit.F 00 x2 00 00 Error in backup/parameter memory The meter supplies this message in the event of a repeated memory test failure. F.F 00 8x 00 00 Error in the display card The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a display card test. The meter does not operate and must be changed. The meter can contain incorrect data. H 71 0200 0042 e en . The meter can contain faulty data or fail.F .F 00 2x 00 00 Error in the ripple control receiver (extension board) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the ripple control receiver on the extension board. F.F 00 1x 00 00 Error in load profile memory (EEPROM) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a memory test. F. The same applies to messages: F. Significance: F..F 00 x1 00 00 Error in RAM main memory This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when starting the meter if the RAM test fails. The meter uses the default configuration. x3 / x5 / x7 / x9 / xB / xD / xF F.F 00 x4 00 00 Error in the measuring system The meter supplies this message for repeated failure of the measuring system test.Errors for write/read access Group 2 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Main memory RAM Backup/parameter memory Measuring system Time base Load profile memory Ripple control receiver (extension board) Communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT) Display card Fig. Communication fails. The liquid crystal display shows incorrect data. F.F 00 x8 00 00 Error in time base The meter sets this message for repeated failure of the time base test. 9.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . F.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults Landis+Gyr 9-7 . F. F.. Landis+Gyr 9-8 H 71 0200 0042 e en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 03 / 05 / 06 / 07 / 09 / 0A up to 0F.F 00 00 02 00 Check-sum error in memory for backup data This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant memory test fails.. The meter can contain incorrect data. The meter can contain incorrect data. The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). . In all 3 cases mentioned the meter does not operate and should be changed. 9. Significance: F.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults .Check-sum errors Group 3 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code ROM check-sum Backup data memory check-sum Parameter memory check-sum Load profile check-sum Check-sum stored values / event log * * * not used * Fig. F.F 00 00 01 00 Check-sum error in ROM of microprocessor This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when the relevant ROM test fails. F.F .5 Group 3 of error message The first digit in the third group can have the value 0 (no error message) or 1 (error message set).F 00 00 08 00 Check-sum error in memory of load profile The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a load profile test.F 00 00 1x 00 Check-sum test for the stored values or event log The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a check-sum test for the stored values or event log. The same applies to messages F.F 00 00 04 00 Check-sum error in memory for parameters This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant EEPROM test fails. F.F 00 00 00 1x System error in microprocessor The meter loses all data determined since the last storage. F. The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set).F 00 00 00 8x Identification of extension board differs from that parametrized in the meter. H 71 0200 0042 e en .F 00 00 00 x8 Setting mode not concluded A setting command has not been concluded correctly. control inputs or output signals. It may not have measured part of the energy. watch dog) * * not used * Extension board identification not valid Fig.F 00 00 00 x2 Overflow or no activity of measuring system The meter has detected an error in the data processing.6 Group 4 of error message The first digit in the fourth group can have the values 0 to 3 and 8 to B.Other errors Gruppe 4 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Startup failed Overflow in measuring system * Setting mode not concluded System error (e. i. The meter can contain incorrect data. The meter possibly does not have functions required such as data profile. for 24 hours maximum. The meter can contain incorrect data.g.F 00 00 00 x1 Invalid startup owing to incorrect data storage The meter has detected that the last data storage was not performed correctly.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . The error is deleted automatically when the next similar setting command is correctly concluded.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults Landis+Gyr 9-9 . F. F.e. Significance: F. 9. 4 "Repairing meters"). Landis+Gyr 9-10 H 71 0200 0042 e en . A damp cleaning cloth is sufficient to remove normal dirt such as dust.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 3. so that a new plastic viewing window can be fitted. misted over or soiled in any way) ? Danger of short-circuits Warning Never clean soiled meters under running water or with high pressure devices. painted over. the meter should be disconnected. Is the mains voltage present (pre-fuses intact and test terminals closed)?. If none of the points listed is the cause of the fault. the following points should first be checked: 1. 2. removed and sent to the responsible service and repair centre (according to section 9. Is the maximum permissible ambient temperature not exceeded ? Is the plastic viewing window over the face plate clean (not scratched.9. If the meter is more heavily soiled.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults . it should be dismantled if necessary and sent to the responsible service and repair centre.2 Operating faults If the liquid crystal display is illegible or the data readout does not function. Penetrating water can cause short-circuits. The meter should be removed as follows: 1. Short-circuit the current transformer with the short-circuit jumpers in the test terminal block using an insulated screwdriver and interrupt the voltage connections with the jumpers in the test terminal block. i.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . TVS14) to remove the meter. TVS14). If there is no test terminal block. This would produce an extremely high voltage of several thousand volts dangerous to life at the terminals and the insulation would be destroyed. 4. H 71 0200 0042 e en .User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults Landis+Gyr 9-11 . it must be possible to open the test terminal (e. the primary voltage must be interrupted. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover.3 9. push the jumper away from the terminal and then re-tighten the screw.3. 2.e. push the shortcircuit jumper over the terminals on the current transformer side and then re-tighten the screw.g.e. Remove the relevant pre-fuses if necessary and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the installation. If the meter is connected via voltage transformers.g. Dangerous voltage on current transformers Danger The secondary sides of the current transformer circuits must not be opened if a current is flowing in the primary. For this purpose release the screw of the relevant jumper with an insulated screwdriver. the primary voltage must be interrupted. i. Remove the corresponding pre-fuses and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the work. the system switched off. the system switched off.7. Short-circuit the current transformer at the test terminal block (e. If there is no test terminal block. 3. If not. For this purpose release the screw of the relevant short-circuit jumper with an insulated screwdriver.9.1 Disconnecting meters Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The connecting conductors must be free from voltage when the meter is removed. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument. check the condition of the test terminals again according to Fig 9. The circuit on the meter side can then be opened without danger. Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it. It is dangerous to life to touch live parts. Landis+Gyr 9-12 H 71 0200 0042 e en . Release the terminal screws 1 to 11 of the phase connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals. Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows: .User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults . 9. A Fig.Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig.8A). 9. .8 B C Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals Damage to terminals Warning Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals.Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 Short-circuit jumpers closed k L1 L2 L3 N l L K k K l k L K L l Voltage jumpers open Pre-fuses and neutral conductor isolator removed Loads Fig 9.Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig.8B).8C).7 Condition of test terminal block before removing meter 5. . 9.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . 7. 9. The terminals could be damaged.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters. 6. Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover.9A).Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig. 4. 4. Remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed. 3. 9. Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows: . 9. 6.3. 10 and 12 of the phase connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals. 9.9. 6. remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed. so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.2 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx) Dangerous voltage on conductors Danger The connecting wires at the place of installation must not be live when removing the meter.User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults Landis+Gyr 9-13 . so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed. 2.Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig. Touching of live parts is dangerous to life. 7. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument.Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig. 3. The terminals could be damaged. Release the terminal screws 1.9B). . . Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it. 5.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .9C). Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7. 9. H 71 0200 0042 e en . A Fig. If they are live.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters. 9. The meter should be removed as follows: 1.9 B C Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals Damage to terminals Warning Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals. 3. Preferably use the original packing if available. 2.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults .4 Repairing meters Meters must only be repaired by the responsible service and repair centre (or manufacturer). Pack the meter to ensure it can suffer no further damage during transport.3 and fit a substitute meter.9. The following procedure should be adopted if a meter repair is necessary: 1. Describe the error found as exactly as possible and state the name and telephone number of the person responsible in case of inquiries. Send the meter to the responsible service and repair centre. Landis+Gyr 9-14 H 71 0200 0042 e en . Do not enclose any loose components. remove the meter as described in section 9. If installed. 4. Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL 10 Decommissioning. disposal H 71 0200 0043a en . 2000 31.com Landis+Gyr 10-2 H 71 0200 0043a en .03.04.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .landisgyr.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.1999 17. Feldstrasse 1 CH .2003 Comments First edition Front page and revision history added New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Landis+Gyr Ltd.07.Revision history Index − – a Date 26.User Manual Revision history . 2 Decommissioning.1 10.User Manual Table of contents Landis+Gyr 10-3 . disposal __________________________ 10-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 H 71 0200 0043a en .Table of contents 10 10.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . User Manual Table of contents .Landis+Gyr 10-4 H 71 0200 0043a en .ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 . User Manual Decommissioning. Disposal and environmental protection regulations Note For the disposal of meters observe the local disposal and environmental protection regulations in effect without fail.10 Decommissioning. 10.ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .3. H 71 0200 0043a en . disposal This chapter explains the disconnection of the meter from the system and its correct disposal. Sorted and taken to recycling (regranulation) plant or if no other possibility to refuse incineration.2 Disposal Based on the data specified in environmental certificate ISO 14001.1 Decommissioning The procedure for disconnecting and removing the meter from the mains is described in Chapter 9. Sorted and taken to collective materials disposal point. Components Printed circuit boards Battery LEDs. the components used in meters are largely separable and can therefore be taken to the relevant disposal or recycling point. Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations. 10. disposal Landis+Gyr 10-5 . LCD-Display Metal parts Plastic components Disposal Electronic waste: disposal according to local regulations. Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations. ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 .Landis+Gyr 10-6 H 71 0200 0043a en .User Manual Decommissioning. disposal . Electricity Meters IEC INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL Landis+Gyr Dialog ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL 11 Index H 71 0200 0141 c en . 06.2003 Comments First edition Update according to document changes New layout according to CI and update according to document changes Update according to document changes for software version B21 Landis+Gyr Ltd.2002 31.6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.02.Revision history Index − a b c Date 28.04.2003 30.ZMD300 AT / CT .2002 19.com Landis+Gyr 11-2 H 71 0200 0141 c en .03. Feldstrasse 1 CH .User Manual Revision history . 9-7 Additional control inputs ______________________________ 4.8-9 Calendar clock ________________________________________2-13. 4. 4. 4. 4.1-5 Block schematic diagram of measuring unit _____________________ 4.9-13 Block schematic diagram _______________________________ 4.1-9 Billing period ______________________________________ 4.1-11.14-7 Aron circuit____________________________________________4. 4.15-9 Analogue-digital converter___________________________________ 4.11 Index This chapter contains an overall index of the user manual ZMD300xT.16-10 Audio frequency filter ______________________________________ 4.8-9.2-8.6-7 Automatic data readout _______________________________________ 6-9 Background lighting of LCD display______________________________ 5-7 Basic current ______________________________________________ 2-11 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Basic layout of LCD display ____________________________________ 5-7 Basic versions of energy recording _______________________ 4.2-5 Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver _______________ 4.User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-3 .2-6.2-10 Calculation of energy consumption ____________________________ 4. 4.13-5 Apparent power __________________________________________ 4. 4.1-9 Additional meter functions_____________________________________ 2-6 Additional output contacts_____________________________ 4.2-8 Active power ___________________________________4. 4.ZMD300 AT / CT .6-11 Billing data _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Battery __________________________________________________ 4.2-9 Active power direction arrow___________________________________ 5-7 Adaptation of energy portions ________________________________ 4.9-16 AT instructions for controlling GSM modems __________________ 4.8-10.2-5.2-8 Aperiodic memory ________________________________________ 4. 4.1-7.1-7 Calculation of apparent power_______________________________ 4.6-6 Buttons_____________________________________________ 4.11-5 Baud rate optical interface ___________________________________ 2-14 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.8-10 Allocation of the data and parameter groups ___________________ 4.4-5 Calendar days ____________________________________________ 4. Absolute accuracy __________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy class _____________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________________ 2-13 Activation of control signals__________________________________ 4.1-11.1-9. 4.7-8 Active component of power__________________________________ 4.8-5.2-10 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.1-11. 7-6 Arrow symbols ______________________________________________ 5-8 Arrows for status indication___________________________________ 3-10 Asynchronous integrating period_____________________________ 4.1-9 Advance ___________________________________________ 4.4-5 H 71 0200 0141 c en . 4. 8-12 Battery disposal ____________________________________________ 8-13 Battery exchange ___________________________________________ 8-11 Battery holder _____________________________________________ 8-12 Battery operating hours counter _______________________________ 8-11 Battery operating time_____________________________________ 4.4-6 Battery charge condition ______________________________________ 5-8 Battery charge status________________________________________ 8-11 Battery compartment____________________________________ 3-6. 4-6 Day tables________________________________________________ 4.1-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 Date change ______________________________________________ 4.ZMD300 AT / CT . 3-5. 4.7-6 Control voltage _____________________________________________2-13 Controlling registers ________________________________________ 4.9-14 Creep test __________________________________________________8-7 CS interface ___________________________________ 4.2-8 Condition of test terminal block before removing meter _____________9-12 Conditions for installation and commissioning______________________7-5 Conditions for the use of this user manual _______________________0-10 Connecting conductor_________________________________________7-7 Connecting meter ____________________________________________7-9 Connecting phase connection lines ______________________________7-9 Connecting signal inputs and outputs ___________________________7-10 Connection diagram control inputs /output contacts________________2-19 Connection diagram extension board ___________________________2-20 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver ___ 4.1-12.1-10. 4. 3-8 Construction of meters ________________________________________3-5 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 Control inputs ___________________________________ 2-13.5-7 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.2-8 Clock time ________________________________________________ 4.14-8 Current values _____________________________________________2-11 Data preparation for billing ____________________________4. 4.4-6 Changing values in set mode __________________________________8-10 Characteristics of meters ______________________________________2-9 Check of connections ________________________________________7-12 Check sum errors ____________________________________________9-8 Checking meter______________________________________________8-5 Clock frequency ___________________________________________ 4. 3-5 Calibration stage___________________________________________ 4.9-18 Landis+Gyr 11-4 H 71 0200 0141 c en .User Manual Index .9-13 Cumulated status __________________________________________ 4.1-12. 4.2-8 Case of meter ___________________________________________ 2-6.5-7 Changing the battery ________________________________________8-11 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4. 7-5 Compensation of natural errors _______________________________ 4.5-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________10-5 Deleting load profile ______________________________________ 4. 6-5 Communication unit _____________________________ 4.1-12. 4.Calibration________________________________________________ 4. 3-5 Changeover date __________________________________________ 4.6-11 Connection diagram three-wire networks ________________________2-19 Connection in spring-loaded terminals___________________________7-11 Connections ___________________________________________ 2-17. 7-13 Communication interface _________________________ 4. 6-8 Cumulated demand maximum _______________________________ 4.1-9.2-8 Calibration seal __________________________________________ 2-6.7-7 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.1-7 Control of display via optical interface ____________________________5-5 Control signal statuses ______________________________________ 4.8-7 Combimeter ________________________________________________2-6 Commissioning _________________________________________ 7-5.7-8 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4. 4.1-11. 8-9 Company seal _______________________________________ 2-6.1-10.13-12 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.8-9 Current monitoring ________________________________________ 4.1-10. 6-12 Display list ____________________________________________ 5-5.8-11.5-6 Device Language Message Specification (DLMS) __________________ 6-12 Digit size of LCD display _____________________________________ 2-13 Digital instantaneous values _________________________________ 4.8-11 Display examples operating time registers _____________________ 4. 5-7 Display buttons _________________________________________ 3-5.6-12.2-12 Disconnecting meter ________________________________________ 9-11 Display ____ 2-13.4-10 Display examples demand recording__________________________ 4. 5-5 Display check ______________________________________________ 5-11 Display examples calendar clock _____________________________ 4. 4. 4.14-8 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.4-10.16-11 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4. 4.9-5 Demand registers_________________________________________ 4.8-9 Energy advance during the recording period ___________________ 4.8-11 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal regulations_________________________________________ 10-5 Disturbances _______________________________________________ 9-5 Division of memory area available __________________________ 4.2-8 Dimensions of meter ________________________________________ 2-16 Direct connection ____________________________________________ 2-6 Direction arrows_____________________________________________ 5-7 Direction of rotating field___________________________________ 4.12-6.ZMD300 AT / CT .9-19. 4.9-7 Energy recording _____________________________________ 4.Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.8-9 Energy status _____________________________________________ 4.10-9.6-5 Energy advance during the billing period _______________________ 4. 5-11 Display menu ______________________________________________ 5-12 Display of events _________________________________________ 4. 4.12-6 Display examples ripple control receiver_______________________ 4.11-5 Display examples power factor ______________________________ 4. 4.8-5.9-13 Demand values for tariff control _____________________________ 4.14-6 Electromagnetic compatibility _________________________________ 2-15 EN 61037 ________________________________________________ 4. 3-10.13-9 Display range changeover _____________________________________ 8-6 Display window __________________________________________ 4.13-6 Display of load profile _____________________________________ 4.9-20 Display examples display list __________________________________ 5-12 Display examples energy recording___________________________ 4.User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-5 .8-9 Environmental protection regulations ___________________________ 10-5 Error code _________________________________________________ 9-5 Error for write/read access ____________________________________ 9-7 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Error in backup/parameter memory _____________________________ 9-7 Error in communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only) __________________ 9-7 Error in display card__________________________________________ 9-7 Error in load profile memory ___________________________________ 9-7 H 71 0200 0141 c en .8-7. 4.10-9 Display examples resetting _________________________________ 4.13-13 DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) __________________ 6-12 DLMS items _______________________________________________ 6-12 DLMS specification __________________________________________ 6-12 Dummy communication unit ___________________________________ 3-6 Effect of hysteresis _______________________________________ 4.8-10 Energy consumption recording _________________________________ 6-9 Energy proportions ___________________________________ 4. 4.9-13 Determination of telephone number and SMS message__________ 4. 1-12. 4. 4.1-10 Face plate _________________________________________________3-10 Faults _____________________________________________________9-5 Field of application of meters ___________________________________2-6 Form of fixing _______________________________________________7-7 Formation of billing periods _________________________________ 4. 4. 6-10.1-7.13-5. 4.1-7.2-7 Landis+Gyr 11-6 H 71 0200 0141 c en .ZMD300 AT / CT .13-5 Exception days table________________________________________ 4.6-5 General view of meter ________________________________________2-5 Hand held terminal _______________________________________ 6-9. 9-5 Event display ____________________________________________ 4.5-7 Extension board _____________________________________4.10-6 Formation of power factor minimum __________________________ 4.9-18 External control of integrating period _________________________ 4.1-9.8-7 Formation of mean value during resetting period ________________ 4.1-11.10-7 Formation of the maximum demand __________________________ 4.1-12.14-6 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.1-10 Impulse voltage strength _____________________________________2-16 Index field__________________________________________________5-8 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 Indication possibilities of LCD display ____________________________5-7 Inhibition of demand measurement___________________________ 4.1-9 Extension board identification error ______________________________9-9 External control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.1-5 Functional check ____________________________________________7-13 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4. 4. 8-9 Hazardous waste ___________________________________________10-5 Hysteresis _______________________________________________ 4. 8-9 Impulse inputs __________________________ 4.9-11 Frequency range____________________________________________2-12 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-12 Front door__________________________________________________2-6 Function overview ____________________________________4.2-10 Freeze function ___________________________________________ 4.10-8 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.User Manual Index .2-9 Formation of power factor mean value during integrating period ___ 4.7-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.13-6 Event log___________________________________________ 4. 4.12-5 Formation of control signals__________________________________ 4.13-8 Event types ______________________________________________ 4.Error in main memory ________________________________________9-7 Error in measuring system _____________________________________9-7 Error in ripple control receiver __________________________________9-7 Error in time base ____________________________________________9-7 Error incorrect data storage ____________________________________9-9 Error indication _____________________________________________5-10 Error invalid startup __________________________________________9-9 Error message _________________________________________ 5-10.2-8 Formation of measured quantities _____________________________ 4. 5-15 Event readout ____________________________________________ 4.9-18 Input circuit ______________________________________________ 4.12-6 IEC 62056-21 ______________________________________ 6-6.9-9 Formation of mean values ___________________________________ 4.9-14 External dimensions of meter__________________________________2-16 External influences __________________________________________2-15 External pulse transmitter ____________________________4.9-12 Formatted commands_________________________________________8-9 Four-quadrant measurement ________________________________ 4. 9-11.1-10 Internal control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.1-7. 5-14 Loading capacity ___________________________________________ 2-11 Log example_______________________________________________ 6-10 Lower part of meter case _____________________________________ 2-6 Main characteristics of meters__________________________________ 2-9 Main face plate ____________________________________________ 3-10 Mains frequency_____________________________________ 4. 3-5 Material for installation of meters _______________________________ 7-5 Maximum current___________________________________________ 2-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.2-6 Measured quantity indication__________________________________ 3-11 Measured values ____________________________________ 4.1-10.9-9 Mean value of power factor during the integrating period _________ 4.1-7 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring uncertainty ____________________________________ 8-6.13-8.10-5 Insufficient battery voltage ____________________________________ 9-6 Insulation strength__________________________________________ 2-15 Integrating period __________________________________ 4. 3-10.2-5 Memory ___________________________________________ 4.2-5 Inputs____________________________________ 2-13.Input mB _________________________________________ 4. 4.2-8. 4.2-7 Interval determination _____________________________________ 4. 4. 4.9-14.1-8 Measures in event of faults ____________________________________ 9-5 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 Measuring deviations _________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring range ___________________________________________ 2-11 Measuring system ____________________________________ 4.1-9.9-11 Invalid time/date ____________________________________________ 9-6 Laptop ________________________________________________ 6-9.10-5 Mean value of power factor during the resetting period __________ 4.9-14 Interface board ____________________________________ 4.4-5 Liquid crystal display _______________________________ 2-13.9-11. 5-7 Leap years _______________________________________________ 4.13-15 Memory management ____________________________________ 4. 3-5 H 71 0200 0141 c en . 4.2-11 Maintenance________________________________________________ 8-5 Manufacturer seal _______________________________________ 2-6. 4.10-6 Measured quantities________________________________________ 4.2-8.1-12. 4.13-13 Memory depth ___________________________________ 4.13-14.1-12. 4.1-11.1-9 Memory area division_____________________________________ 4. 4.13-13 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.1-9. 8-7 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4. 4. 8-9 LCD display ______________________________________ 2-13. 4. 4.9-11 Interval period ___________________________________________ 4.9-18 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Input signals _____________________________________________ 4. 4.ZMD300 AT / CT .2-8 Mean value of demand _____________________________________ 4.9-19 Internal current transformer _________________________________ 4. 4.User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-7 . 5-7 Lithium battery_____________________________________________ 8-11 Load profile __________________________________ 4.9-12 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 Mean value formation ______________________________________ 4.1-10 Interfaces____________________________________ 2-14.4-8 Meter board ________________________________________________ 7-7 Meter case _____________________________________________ 2-6. 3-10. 4.3-5 Installation _________________________________________________ 7-5 Instantaneous values_________________________________ 4. 16-5 Operating messages recording_______________________________ 4. 4.12-6 Mounting the meter __________________________________________7-7 Movement accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________2-13 Neutral ____________________________________________________7-6 Neutral current ______________________________________4.1-9.14-5 Monitoring functions_______________________________________ 4. 4. 6-6. 4. 4.1-10 Modifying operating data or meter characteristics __________________8-9 Monitored values _________________________________________ 4.2-11 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.11-5 Operation with only one or two phases __________________________2-11 Optical button _______________________________________________5-5 Optical interface ___________________________ 2-14. 8-7 Meter construction ___________________________________________3-5 Meter dimensions ___________________________________________2-17 Meter mounting _____________________________________________7-7 Meter testing __________________________________________ 5-16.2-12 Phase connections _______________________________ 2-17.6-9 Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver______________________ 4.14-7 Monitoring principle _______________________________________ 4. 8-7 Output contacts _______________________________________ 2-13. 5-16.3-6 Periodic memory__________________________________________ 4.1-7 Landis+Gyr 11-8 H 71 0200 0141 c en . 4.14-5 Monthly resetting _________________________________________ 4.ZMD300 AT / CT .1-12.14-8 Monitoring of power factor__________________________________ 4.1-7. 3-5. 3-10.14-8 Monitoring of demand _____________________________________ 4.1-9. 4. 4.13-8 Periodical meter check ________________________________________8-5 Phase angle _____________________________________________ 4.2-10 OBIS index system ___________________________________________5-9 Object Identification System OBIS_______________________________5-9 Objective of DLMS __________________________________________6-12 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 Operating faults ____________________________________________9-10 Operating hours counter _____________________________________8-11 Operating messages _______________________________________ 4.11-5 Operating time registers____________________________________ 4.6-9 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-5 Overflow of measuring system__________________________________9-9 Overview meter function _______________________________4.9-16 No activity of measuring system ________________________________9-9 No-load test ________________________________________________8-7 Normal mode _______________________________________________8-5 Numbering of quadrants ___________________________________ 4.15-5 Parametrization tool RPT01 for ripple control receivers ____________ 4.10-7 Modem ___________________________________________4. 3-11 Output values ______________________________________________2-13 Outputs __________________________________ 2-13.User Manual Index . 8-9 Optical test output __________________________________ 3-5.1-7.Meter check ________________________________________________8-5 Meter connection ____________________________________________7-9 Meter connections ___________________________________________3-8 Meter constant _________________________________________ 2-13. 8-5 Minimum formation power factor_____________________________ 4.14-5 Monitoring of currents _____________________________________ 4.2-5. 4.14-9 Monitoring of voltage ______________________________________ 4.16-6 Operating time per tariff ___________________________________ 4.1-5 Ownership designation _______________________________________3-11 Parameter overwriting protection ____________________________ 4. 13-14.2-5.13-8 Register capacity __________________________________________ 4.6-5 Pulse width of test output ____________________________________ 2-13 Purpose of this user manual __________________________________ 0-10 Purpose of use of meters _____________________________________ 2-6 Push buttons ________________________________________ 4.2-11.4-6 Power supply _______________________________________ 4.1-9.8-8.2-6.14-9 Power factor register ______________________________________ 4. 4.8-5 Recording of energy consumption_______________________________ 6-9 Recording of measured values __________________________ 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.10-7 Power reserve of calendar clock __________________________2-13.13-15 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4. 4.9-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4. 4.9-19.10-9. 4.1-12. 4.8-11.2-9 Quartz frequency __________________________________________ 4.4-6 Radio interference suppression ________________________________ 2-15 Range changeover ___________________________________________ 8-6 Range of time elements_____________________________________ 4.4-5 Recording counting pulses for other physical media ________________ 2-6 Recording of demand ______________________________________ 4. 5-15 Rated frequency____________________________________________ 2-12 Rated voltage______________________________________________ 2-11 Reactive component of power________________________________ 4. 4. 4.2-8.2-8 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 Power factor__________________________________4.12-6 Readout device _____________________________________________ 6-9 Readout log _______________________________________________ 6-10 Readout of events ________________________________________ 4. 4. 4.9-5 Recording of energy _______________________________________ 4.1-11. 4.9-8 H 71 0200 0141 c en .2-5.2-5.10-5 Power factor minimum ____________________________________ 4. 4.2-9 Reactive power direction arrow_________________________________ 5-8 Reading head __________________________________________ 6-9. 4.13-12 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Readout to IEC 62056-21 ____________________________________ 6-10 Real Time Clock (RTC)______________________________________ 4.13-8 Readout of load profile ___________________________________ 4.8-12 Principle of DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Principle of monitoring_____________________________________ 4.8-5.9-8 Register resolution ____________________________________ 4. 4.1-7 Quadrant display ____________________________________________ 5-8 Quadrant numbering ______________________________________ 4.1-7. 4.2-8 Reactive power _________________________________4.2-11 Phase voltage indication ______________________________________ 5-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 Power calculation __________________________________________ 4.1-10 Pulse telegram ____________________________________________ 4.2-11 Phase voltage_______________________________________ 4.4-5 Rapid run ____________________________________________ 5-12. 4.1-9.10-7 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-9 . 4.14-5 Profile width _____________________________________ 4.2-10 Quadrants _______________________________________________ 4. 8-10 Readout _________________4.4-10.13-5 Protection class ____________________________________________ 2-15 Pulse frequency of test output ________________________________ 2-13 Pulse inputs _______________________ 3-11.Phase current_______________________________________ 4.16-6 Recording period of load profile _____________________________ 4. 4.6-12.ZMD300 AT / CT .1-9 Primary data ____________________________________________ 4. 1-8.Register size _______________________________________4.User Manual Index . 4.1-10.2-8 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4. 4. 8-10 Resetting__________________________________________4.6-9 RS232 interface ________________________________ 4. 3-8 Sealing pliers _______________________________________________7-5 Sealing with padlock__________________________________________3-7 Seals ______________________________________________________3-5 Season table ______________________________________________ 4.6-6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.1-8 Signalling of operating messages_____________________________ 4.15-5 Security system __________________________________________ 4.1-10.16-6.2-7 Signal processor ______________________________________4.8-11.9-9 S0 interface____________________________________ 4.ZMD300 AT / CT . 4. 4.1-9.6-10 Rolling display______________________________________________5-10 Rolling mean value _________________________________________ 4.2-8 RPT01 parametrization tool __________________________________ 4. 9-5 Sending an SMS message ____________________________4.2-5. 4. 4.9-19 Signal utilization _____________________________________4.1-12.12-5 Reset block ______________________________________________ 4. 5-14 Service menu ______________________________________________5-15 Service mode ______________________________________________5-14 Set mode ____________________________________________ 5-15. 4.5-6 Secondary data___________________________________________ 4. 6-6 Safety pictographs ___________________________________________1-5 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 Seal _______________________________________________________2-6 Seal component _________________________________________ 3-7.8-10.9-11 Responsibilities for security ____________________________________1-5 Restoration of voltage _______________________________________2-14 Ripple control receiver (RCR) _____________________ 4.1-11.15-6 Security levels____________________________________________ 4. 4.8-12 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.9-19 Regulations for the security ____________________________________1-6 Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal _________________7-11 Removing connections in spring-loaded terminals _________________9-12 Repair centre ______________________________________________9-14 Repairing meters ___________________________________________9-14 Replacement battery ________________________________________8-11 Representation of type designations ____________________________0-11 Reset___________________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal processing _________________________ 4. 4.2-6. 8-10 Setting mode not concluded ___________________________________9-9 Signal conversion _____________________________________4.1-12.1-10. 4. 4.8-10. 4.9-9 Landis+Gyr 11-10 H 71 0200 0141 c en . 4.2-7 Signal preparation _________________________________________ 4. 6-7 RS485 interface ________________________________ 4. 4.9-9 Rotating field _____________________________________________ 4.1-12.16-5 Simple mean value _________________________________________ 4. 4.15-5 Self-test ______________________________________________ 5-10. 6-7 Running mean value of demand ______________________________ 4.2-5.1-10.9-13 Residual value processing ____________________________4.16-8 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-14 Series designation ___________________________________________2-8 Service ____________________________________________________8-5 Service and repair centre _____________________________________9-14 Service list_____________________________________________ 5-6.12-5 Reset button R _____________________________________ 3-6.1-10. 5-6. 4-6 Supplementary power supply _____________________ 2-14. 7-8 SYNC control signal ________________________________________ 4.ZMD300 AT / CT .7-5 Tariff control signals _______________________________________ 4. 4.SMS control _____________________________________________ 4.1-11.5-5 Suryey resetting__________________________________________ 4. 4.14-5 Survey Operating messages ________________________________ 4. 4.13-8 Subdivision of this user manual________________________________ 0-10 Substitute meter __________________________________ 8-5. 4. 9-12 Standard data _____________________________________________ 5-12 Starting current ____________________________________________ 2-11 Starting limit ______________________________________________ 2-11 Starting power ________________________________________ 2-11. 7-11.8-10.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.6-5 Tariff face plate ____________________________________________ 3-11 Tariff structure ____________________________________________ 4.16-12 Stored value_______________________________________ 4.8-10 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4. 9-12.13-8 Status indication arrows _____________________________________ 3-10 Status report of SMS message _____________________________ 4.User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-11 .9-5 Survey energy recording ____________________________________ 4.1-9 Survey calendar clock ______________________________________ 4.16-8 SMS message____________________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.16-6 Software version ____________________________________________ 2-9 Solid state relay ____________________________________________ 2-13 Spring-loaded terminals_________________________2-18.1-10.4-8 System error in microprocessor_________________________________ 9-9 Target group of this user manual ______________________________ 0-10 Tariff control __________________________________4.10-8 Tariff switching __________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey Time switch ________________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey power factors______________________________________ 4.13-13 Structure of error messages ___________________________________ 9-5 Structure of load profile____________________________________ 4.9-13. 2-12 Starting test ________________________________________________ 8-8 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 Status entry of load profile _________________________________ 4. 4.2-5 Survey monitoring functions ________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey measuring unit______________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey communication interfaces _______________________________ 6-5 Survey demand recording ___________________________________ 4.5-5 Tariff switching ____________________________________ 4.1-8.6-9 Telemetering _______________________________________________ 2-6 Temperature coefficient______________________________________ 2-15 Temperature range _________________________________________ 2-15 H 71 0200 0141 c en .4-5 Synchronization intervals____________________________________ 4.1-9 Supply voltages _____________________________________ 4. 4.16-5 Survey operating time registers _____________________________ 4.4-7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.4-5 Supercap ________________________________________________ 4.9-13 Stored values ___________________________________________ 4. 3-9.1-11.12-5 Suspension eyelet ___________________________________________ 7-7 Suspension triangle _____________________________________ 2-16. 9-14 Summer time _____________________________________________ 4. 4.7-6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4. 12-5 Time-base error _____________________________________________9-6 Tools for installation of meters _________________________________7-5 Total active power _________________________________________ 4.10-9.2-7 Voltage interruption _________________________________________2-14 Voltage monitoring ________________________________________ 4. 4.ZMD300 AT / CT .2-9 Transmission contact _________________________________________2-6 Type designation ____________________________________________2-8 Type of measurement ZFD400xx ______________________________ 4.User Manual Index . 4.12-6 Versions of communication units ________________________________6-6 Versions of energy recording ____________________________4.4-6 Units field __________________________________________________5-8 Upper part of meter case ______________________________________2-6 Value display__________________________________________ 5-12.2-6 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.4-8 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4. 8-5 Test output ________________________________________________2-13 Test SMS message _______________________________________ 4.6-9 Test mode___________________________________________ 4.9-20. 5-15 Value field __________________________________________________5-8 Value of operating messages ________________________________ 4. 3-5 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.8-7.8-5.5-5 Time window for reset block ________________________________ 4.16-6 Value register ________________________________________4. 4.16-12 Test voltage ________________________________________________8-7 Testing meter _______________________________________________8-5 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.3-5 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.4-6 Time deviations ___________________________________________ 4.4-6 Time change ______________________________________________ 4.2-8 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.2-7 Type of measurement ZMD400xx _____________________________ 4.2-12 ZMD300CT _________________________________________________2-6 Landis+Gyr 11-12 H 71 0200 0141 c en . 4. 4. 4.9-5 Viewing window _____________________________________________2-6 Voltage divider ____________________________________________ 4.14-7 Voltage range ______________________________________________2-11 Voltage restoration __________________________________________2-14 Weekdays ________________________________________________ 4.11-5 Total reactive power________________________________________ 4.2-8.9-7 Values available for readout and display __________ 4.8-8 Types of error _______________________________________________9-6 Types of monitoring _______________________________________ 4.3-7 Terminal dimensions ________________________________________2-18 Terminal layout________________________________________ 3-9.4-5 Zero passage _______________________________________4.2-9 Total apparent power ______________________________________ 4.14-5 Types of synchronizing______________________________________ 4.4-5 Weight of meter ____________________________________________2-16 Winter time _______________________________________________ 4. 2-16.4-5 Time measurement_________________________________________ 4.8-11.2-10 Total operating time _______________________________________ 4.Terminal cover _____________________________________ 2-6.